Home

- Projektor.pl

1. I 63 Before USING synchronization uas vocensivzauckiucrioris aeta Vira w QUO Cx rocas Ew UT d 64 About synchronized operations eeeeeeee eiie eeeeeeeeeeeeee eene n enhn nnn nnne nnn n nnn n nnn annu nn 64 Setting the POLS FUNCH ON ioi oou tira eo aen inn eade eo cca Coca nud eesti ca suas deze cEe Get haad Essa E duas Ninaa 64 About Sound Retriever Link and Stream Smoother Link esses 64 Cautions on the Control with HDMI function 1eeeeeeee esee eene nennen enne nennen nnn nnn nnn 65 Control with HDMI function About the Control with HDMI function Synchronized operations below with a Control with HDMI compatible Pioneer TV or Blu ray Disc player are pos sible when the component is connected to the receiver using an HDMI cable e The receiver s volume can be set and the sound can be muted using the TV s remote control e The receiver s input switches over automatically when the TV s input is changed or a Control with HDMI compatible component is played e The receiver s power is also set to standby when the TV s power is set to standby amp Important e With Pioneer devices the Control with HDMI functions are referred to as KURO LINK e You cannot use this function with components that do not support Control with HDMI e We only guarantee this receiver will work with Pioneer C
2. Basic MULTI ZONE setup ZONE 2 Connect a separate amplifier to the AUDIO ZONE 2 OUT jacks on this receiver You should have a pair of speakers attached to the sub zone amplifier as shown in the following illustration Sub zone ZONE 2 I Main zone MULTI ZONE setup using speaker terminals ZONE 2 You must select ZONE 2 in Speaker system setting page 89 to use this setup Connect a pair of speakers to the surround back speaker terminals You should have a pair of speakers attached to the surround back speaker terminals as shown below Sub zone ZONE 2 Main zone SURROUND BACK HDZONE L Single MULTI ZONE setup using HDMI terminal HDZONE amp Important e The settings must be changed at ZONE Setup in order to use the HDZONE function page 94 e To use the HDZONE functions set Control or Control Mode in HDMI Setup to OFF For details see HOMI Setup on page 63 Connect a separate receiver to the HDMI OUT 2 HDZONE terminal on this receiver Connect speakers and a TV to the HDZONE receiver as shown on the illustration below Sub zone HDZONE ri Main zone Connecting your equipment Multi zone connection using the HDMI terminal and speaker terminals HDZONE amp Important e The settings must be changed at ZONE Setup in order to use the HDZONE function page 94 e To use the HDZONE functions set Control or Control Mode in HDMI Setu
3. Instead of logging onto the domain log onto the local machine page 57 Check the firewall settings for components on the network Check the connection settings for components on the network and consult with your network service provider if necessary page 91 There are cases where you cannot listen to some Internet radio stations even when they are listed in the list of Inter net radio stations on this receiver page 57 An Internet connection is required for both the mobile digital device and this unit Connect the mobile digital device by Wi Fi to the wireless LAN router of the same network as the one to which this unit is connected A Spotify Premium account for a charge must be regis tered on the Spotify application When this unit is in standby it cannot be selected from the Spotify application FAQ Symptom Cause Remedy F 4 Wireless LAN The sound of the Spotify Check whether this unit is selected on the Spotify applica audio stream is not pro tion Network cannot be accessed via wireless LAN duced Check that contents are playing on the Spotify application Wireless LAN converter s power is not on If the above does not solve the problem turn this unit s e Check that the USB cable connecting the wireless LAN converter to the receiver s DC OUTPUT for power off then back on WIRELESS LAN terminal is properly connected With an AV receiver that has the If this is the case set which zone
4. Defaults Neo X CINEMA 1 0 Neo X MUSIC 0 3 Neo X GAME 1 0 lt 10 to 90 gt Defaults 50 LOW MID HIGH AUTO MANUAL OFF ON OFF ON Setting What it does Option s When you re not using front wide speakers selecting this mode OFF V WIDE allows you to hear a virtual front wide channel through your front Virtual Wide speakers m This improves the continuity of the sound from the front channel to ON the surround channels OFF V DEPTH When this mode is selected the sound field expands virtually to MIN Virtual Depth behind the display resulting in a sound field with the same depth as eno the 3D picture to achieve a better sense of presence MID MAX Using other functions The adjustment can be made only when TONE is set to ON e The default value changes depending on the type of input page 74 e When ON is selected the Sound Retriever effect is optimized based on the bitrate information of the contents input to the USB memory audio and INTERNET RADIO PANDORA Australian model only MEDIA SERVER FAVORITES digital audio input only to achieve high sound quality e With the iPod USB INTERNET RADIO PANDORA Australian model only MEDIA SERVER FAVORITES or BT AUDIO input function by default S RTRV is set to ON e When ON is selected optimum correction of the audio signals input via the HDMI OUT terminal is conducted with the HDMI ARC Audio Return Channel function and the sound of digital TV broad
5. For more information see the Apple website http www apple com DLNA The Digital Living Network Alliance DLNA is a cross industry organization of consumer electronics comput ing industry and mobile device companies Digital Living provides consumers with easy sharing of digital media through a wired or wireless network in the home vTuner vluner is a paid online database service that allows you to listen to radio and TV broadcasts on the Internet vIuner lists thousands of stations from over 100 different countries around the globe For more detail about vIuner visit the following website http www radio pioneer com This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of NEMS and BridgeCo Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from NEMS and BridgeCo or an authorized subsidiary Apple Lossless ALAC ALAC stands for Apple Lossless Audio Codec This is a loseless type audio codec and is used for example for iTunes It compresses non compressed files such as WAV and AIFF to about one half the original size with no loss of sound quality FLAC FLAC Free Lossless Audio Codec is an audio format allows lossless codec Audio is compressed in FLAC with out any loss in quality For more details about FLAC visit the following website http flac sourceforge net Windows Media Windows Media is a multimedia framework for media creation and distr
6. These settings are designed to customize your system but if you re satisfied with the settings made in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC on page 37 it isn t necessary to make all of these settings A CAUTION e The test tones used in the Manual SP Setup are output at high volume 1 Select Manual SP Setup then press ENTER See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu on page 89 if you re not already at this screen 2 Select the setting you want to adjust If you are doing this for the first time you may want to adjust these settings in order Speaker System Specifies how you are using your surround back speaker terminals and B speaker termi nals page 89 Speaker Setting Specifies the size and number of speakers you ve connected page 89 e Channel Level Adjusts the overall balance of your speaker system page 90 Speaker Distance Specifies the distance of your speakers from the listening position page 90 e X Curve Adjusts the tonal balance of your speaker system for movie soundtracks page 90 3 Make the adjustments necessary for each setting pressing RETURN to confirm after each screen Speaker system setting e Default setting Normal SB FH There are several ways you can use the speaker terminals with this receiver In addition to a normal home theater setup where they are used for the front height speakers or front wide speakers they can be used for
7. What it does With the Auto Sound Retriever function DSP processing is used to compensate for the loss of audio data upon compression improving the sound s sense of density and modulation Also when a player supporting the Sound Retriever Link function is connected to the receiver by HDMI by setting this to ON the bitrate information of the compressed audio file being played on the player is acquired using the Control with HDMI function and the sound is optimized based on this information Sound Retriever Link May improve the quality of sound in a noisy source for example video tape with lots of background noise when switched on This only has an effect with 2 channel signal inputs This mode is effective for contents with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz or less Localizes dialog in the center channel to make it stand out from other background sounds in a TV or movie soundtrack By moving from UP1 through UP2 and UPS up to UP4 you can make the sound source seem to relocate upwards Creates a wider dynamic range with digital sources like CDs DVDs or BDs 16 and 20 bit PCM as well as compressed audio is requantized to 24 bits more subtle musical expression This mode is effective for contents with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz or less Switches the PQLS function between AUTO and OFF Setting the PQLS function on page 64 Specifies how dual mono encoded Dolby Digital soundtracks should be played Dual mono is not
8. In case the router connected to the LAN terminal on this receiver is a broadband router with a built in DHCP server function simply turn on the DHCP server function and you will not need to set up the network manually You must set up the network as described below only when you have connected this receiver to a broadband router without a DHCP server function Before you set up the network consult with your ISP or the network man ager for the required settings It is advised that you also refer to the operation manual supplied with your network component e n case you make changes to the network configuration without the DHCP server function make the corre sponding changes to the network settings of this receiver IP Address The IP address to be entered must be defined within the following ranges If the IP address defined is beyond the following ranges you cannot play back audio files stored on components on the network or listen to Internet radio stations Class A 10 0 0 1 to 10 255 255 254 Class B 172 16 0 1 to 172 311 255 254 Class C 192 168 0 1 to 192 168 255 254 Subnet Mask In case an xDSL modem or a terminal adapter is directly connected to this receiver enter the subnet mask pro vided by your ISP on paper In most cases enter 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway In case a gateway router is connected to this receiver enter the corresponding IP address Primary DNS Server Secondary DNS Server In case there is only
9. 0155 Hantor 0155 Harwood 0154 0155 HCM 0140 0141 0142 0151 0154 0155 0229 Hema 0154 0229 Higashi 0228 HiLine 0155 Hinari 0142 0143 0147 0149 0152 0154 0155 Hisawa 0143 0151 0156 Hitachi 0137 0141 0145 0146 0147 0155 0191 0226 0229 Hornyphon 0149 0155 Hoshai 0143 Huanyu 0141 0228 Hygashi 0141 0228 0229 Hyper 0141 0142 0154 0228 0229 Hypson 0140 0141 0149 0151 0152 0155 0156 0229 Iberia 0155 ICE 0140 0141 0142 0143 0149 0154 0155 0228 0229 ICeS 0228 Imperial 0125 0132 0146 0149 0150 0155 Indiana 0149 0152 0155 Ingelen 0146 Ingersol 0142 0154 Inno Hit 0132 0141 0142 0143 0149 0152 0154 0155 0229 Innovation 0140 0142 Interactive 0125 Interbuy 0142 0154 Interfunk 0125 0138 0146 0149 0152 0155 International 0228 Intervision 0125 0140 0141 0144 0155 0229 Irradio 0132 0142 0143 0149 0152 0154 0155 Isukai 0143 0155 ITC 0141 0229 ITS 0143 0149 0151 0155 0228 ITT 0142 0146 ITV 0142 0152 0155 JVC 0134 0135 0147 0149 0192 Kaisui 0141 0142 0143 0151 0154 0155 0228 0229 Kamosonic 0141 Kamp 0141 0228 Kapsch 0146 Karcher 0125 0141 0142 0152 0155 Kawasho 0228 Kendo 0125 0144 0145 0155 KIC 0229 Kingsley 0141 0228 Kneissel 0125 0133 0155 Kolster 0149 0155 Konka 0143 Korpel 0149 0152 0155 Korting 0125 0138 Kosmos 0155 Koyoda 0142 KTV 0141 0229 Kyoto 0228 0229 Lasat 0125
10. 1 Press TOOLS to switch to the software keyboard operation mode 2 Usef 4 9 to select letters or symbols then press ENTER Repeat this until all the desired characters have been input 3 Select OK on the software keyboard then press ENTER e To quit inputting characters using the software keyboard press the TOOLS button About the Spotify audio stream playback function Spotify is a music streaming distribution service managed and operated by Spotify Ltd and distributing music over the Internet Spotify audio streams can be enjoyed using this unit and your smartphone or other mobile digital device Preparations 1 Installing the Spotify application on mobile digital devices and registering a Spotify Premium account amp Important e The Spotify application must be installed on mobile digital devices and you must have registered a Spotify Premium account for a charge in order to use the Spotify audio stream playback function on this unit For registration procedures and other Spotify services see the Spotify website http www spotity com http www spotify com connect For information on the countries and regions where Spotify services can be used see the website below http www spotify com Spotify functions may be changed without notice An Internet connection is required on the mobile digital device in order to use the Spotify application Using the mobile telephone line for the Internet connection
11. 10BASE T 100BASE TX A Notes e Refer to the operation manual of the equipment you have as the connected equipment and connection method may differ depending on your Internet environment e When using a broadband Internet connection a contract with an Internet service provider is required For more details contact your nearest Internet service provider Connecting an iPod This receiver has a dedicated iPod terminal that will allow you to control playback of audio content from your iPod using the controls of this receiver Tip e An iPod iPhone can be connected to the receiver For details on supported models and versions of the respec tive products see Playing an iPod on page 44 Switch the receiver into standby and then use the iPod cable to connect your iPod to the iPod iPhone terminal on the front panel of this receiver e Forthe cable connection also refer to the operating instructions for your iPod e When connecting an iPhone to this unit keep the iPhone at least 20 cm 0 66 ft away from this unit If the iPhone is kept closer to this unit and a telephone call is received by the iPhone noise may be output from this device e iPod recharging occurs whenever an iPod is connected to this unit Recharging is enabled only when the unit s power is turned on e For instructions on playing the iPod see Playing an iPod on page 44 Connecting a USB device It is possible to
12. After auto calibration with EQ Type SYMMETRY Full Auto MCACC etc the graph for the inferred reverb characteristics can be displayed by selecting Reverb View To display the actually measured reverb characteristics after EQ calibration measure with EQ ON When the reverb measurement is finished you can select Reverb View to see the results on screen See Professional Calibration EQ graphical output on page 101 for troubleshooting information 4 Ifyou selected Reverb View you can check the reverb characteristics for each channel Press RETURN when you re done The reverb characteristics are displayed when the Reverb Measurement measurements are conducted Use m w to select the channel frequency and calibration setting you want to check Use ft 4 to go back and forth between the three The reverb characteristics graph before and after EQ calibration can be displayed by selecting Calibration Before After Note that the markers on the vertical axis indicate decibels in 2 dB steps 5 If Advanced EQ Setup is selected select the MCACC memory to be stored then enter the desired time setting for calibration and then select START e To specify the place where the MCACC memory is to be stored press MCACC to select the MCACC memory you want to store Based on the reverb measurement above you can choose the time period that will be used for the final frequency adjustment and calibration Even though you can make this setting w
13. HDZONE With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy 5 2 channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo playback on another component in HDZONE The selection of input devices is limited Main zone HDZONE Sub zone Other speaker connections e Your favorite speaker connections can be selected even if you have fewer than 5 2 speakers except front left right speakers e When not connecting a subwoofer connect speakers with low frequency reproduction capabilities to the front channel The subwoofer s low frequency component is played from the front speakers so the speakers could be damaged e After connecting be sure to conduct the Full Auto MCACC speaker environment setting procedure See Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC on page 37 Connecting your equipment Placing the speakers Connecting the speakers Refer to the chart below for placement of the speakers you intend to connect Each speaker connection on the receiver comprises a positive and negative terminal Make sure to match these up with the terminals on the speakers themselves FHL SW2 SW1 FHR This unit supports speakers with a nominal impedance of 6Q to 16 Q 4 OE IE A CAUTION 302 30 e These speaker terminals carry HAZARDOUS LIVE voltage To prevent the risk of electric shock when con FWL FWR E p o necting or disconnecting the speaker cables disconnect the power cord befo
14. Scott 2120 2187 SEG 2116 2178 2181 2189 Sharp 2097 2141 2174 Sigmatek 2185 Silva 2186 Singer 2180 2181 Skymaster 2153 2181 Skyworth 2186 Slim Art 2188 SM Electronic 2181 Sony 2104 2108 2123 2124 2125 2150 2175 Soundmaster 2181 Soundmax 2181 Spectra 2189 Standard 2181 Star Cluster 2181 Starmedia 2184 Sunkai 2188 Supervision 2181 Synn 2181 Tatung 2130 2188 TCM 2097 Teac 2162 2177 2181 Tec 2186 Technika 2188 BD Telefunken 2183 Tensai 2188 Tevion 2097 2181 2187 Thomson 2098 2112 2155 2159 Tokai 2178 2186 Toshiba 2102 2156 2168 2169 2172 TRANScontinents 2189 Trio 2188 TruVision 2185 Wharfedale 2180 2181 Xbox 2098 Xlogic 2181 2188 XMS 2188 Yamada 2189 Yamaha 2106 Yamakawa 2178 2189 Yukai 2101 2147 If operations are not possible using the preset codes below you may be able to conduct operations with the preset codes for the DVD DVR BDR HDR Pioneer 2034 2192 2255 2258 2259 2200 2281 Denon 2310 2311 2312 Hitachi 2307 2308 2309 DVR BDR HDR JVC 2290 2291 2293 2294 2295 2296 LG 2286 2287 Marantz 2302 2303 Mitsubishi 2300 2301 Onkyo 2289 Panasonic 22 7 2278 2279 Philips 2280 Samsung 2282 Sharp 2304 2305 2306 Sony 2283 2284 2285 2292 Toshiba 2288 2262 Yamaha 2297 2298 2299 If operations are not possible using the preset codes below you may be able to conduct operations with the preset codes for
15. Surround right Surround left Surround back left ZONE 2 Right ZONE 2 Left HDZONE setting HDZONE Right HDZONE Left Bi amping your speakers Bi amping is when you connect the high frequency driver and low frequency driver of your speakers to different amplifiers for better crossover performance Your speakers must be bi ampable to do this having separate termi nals for high and low and the sound improvement will depend on the kind of speakers you re using Front left Front right Bi amp compatible speaker Bi amp compatible speaker Subwoofer 1 Center Subwoofer 2 LINE LEVEL E oun LINE LEVEL INPUT O O INPUT 6606060690 00009090 jPEAKERS SPEAKERS Surround right Surround left A CAUTION e Most speakers with both High and Low terminals have two metal plates that connect the High to the Low terminals These must be removed when you are bi amping the speakers or you could severely damage the amplifier See your speaker manual for more information e f your speakers have a removable crossover network make sure you do not remove it for bi amping Doing so may damage your speakers Bi wiring your speakers Your speakers can also be bi wired if they support bi amping e With these connections the Speaker System setting makes no difference A CAUTION e Don t connect different speakers from the same terminal in this way e When bi wiring as well heed the
16. can cause operational errors e When the receiver s Control is turned ON even if the receiver s power is in the standby mode it is possible to output the audio and video signals from a player via HDMI to the TV without producing sound from the receiver but only when a Control with HDMI compatible component Blu ray Disc player etc and compatible TV are connected In this case the receiver s power turns on and the power and HDMI indicators light e f the Control setting is not set to OFF the power consumption during standby will increase Control with HDMI function Using other functions Setting the Audio options aes le nme eee ec eset 67 Setting the Video OptionS RE 69 Switching the output OUTPUT PARAMETER ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeseseeeseseseeeeeeeeeeess 71 Changing the channel level while listening eeeeeeeee eee 71 Using the MULETI ZONE COMUIOUS scsi csiiiestcnccsstacseoctwecacsdertnchexassucnauatessacenwttexssusincsaseanvenesaneatwooiassans 72 Network settings from a web browser eeeeeeeeeees eese e eene eene eene n nnne nnn nnne n nnns 73 Using THE Sleep UMET seccsies sere eces iacsvou OR aaeeea VH FRE arad etus atzaT EV Du R VENERE U Ru RU e Eakin 73 Dimog Ne diS play NNI TT EET 73 Checking your system SEMINO S sasssa KAA aa EO EA AS EEEN EAEEREN 73 Resetting the Systeri aussi en caveocencavins duniiravannoseueseabudarsnsa
17. lt b gt O 0O og U X o o n o SES ES Controlling the rest of your system TV Projector Button s TV Projector SOURCE POWER ON MOVIE STANDARD DYNAMIC USER1 USER2 USERS COLOR SHARP GAMMA COLOR SHARP COLOR TEMP A O L ENTER CLASS EXIT INFO t t e ENTER t t e ENTER TEST HIDE MENU HDMI1 HDMI 2 COMP VIDEO S VIDEO BRIGHT BRIGHT POWER OFF ASPECT CONTRAST CH The Advanced MCACC menu Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC menu serene 82 Automatic MCACC EXDO6Lt siiunnia xh nik a RUERERUKROEEM EAD Na SERUUM USOS PER OSEE ERE SAYUEUU UK XANEEFEDRVRAERM ENNNA S IE 82 Manual MCACE Setup seias eue MEE ME ee ME 84 CHECKING MCACC Datel CC 86 Data Wiel CIC I p et cere tee dunes 87 The Advanced MCACC menu Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC menu The Advanced MCACC Multi Channel ACoustic Calibration system was developed in Pioneer s laboratories with the aim of making it possible for home users to perform adjustments of the same level as in a studio easily and with high precision The acoustic characteristics of the listening environment are measured and the frequency response is calibrated accordingly to allow high precision automatic analysis and optimal calibration of the sound field to bring it clo
18. of your display device Switch off the video converter and reconnect the source and display device using the same type of connection component or composite then start playback again If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support Symptom HDCP ERROR shows in the display Remedy Check whether or not the connected component is compatible with HDCP If it is not compatible with HDCP reconnect the source device using a different type of connection component or composite Some components that are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be displayed but so long as there is no problem with displaying video this is not a malfunction Synchronized operation not possible Check the HDMI connections using Control with HDMI function The cable may be damaged Select ON for the Control Mode with HDMI setting see HDMI Setup on page 63 Turn the TV s power on before turning on this receiver s power Set the TV side Control with HDMI setting to on see TV s operating instructions Connect the TV to the HDMI OUT 1 terminal and set the HDMI output to OUT 1 Then turn on first the TV s power then this receiver s power When HDZONE is set to ON the This is due to the HDMI connection specifications it is not a malfunction When play video resolution and number of audio channels fo
19. 0138 0149 0152 0155 Britannia 0141 0228 0229 Bruns 0138 BTC 0143 Bush 0142 0143 0145 0147 0149 0151 0152 0154 0155 0180 0193 0229 Capsonic 0140 Carena 0155 Carrefour 0147 Cascade 0142 0154 0155 Casio 0221 Cathay 0149 0152 0155 CCE 0229 Centurion 0149 0152 0155 Century 0138 CGE 0125 0132 Cimline 0142 0154 City 0142 0154 Clarivox 0152 Clatronic 0125 0132 0140 0141 0142 0143 0149 0150 0154 0155 0229 CMS 0228 CMS Hightec 0229 Concorde 0142 0154 Condor 0125 0141 0149 0150 0154 0155 0228 Contec 0141 0142 0147 0154 0228 Continental Edison 0148 Cosmel 0142 0154 Crosley 0132 0138 Crown 0125 0132 0142 0149 0150 0152 0154 0155 CS Electronics 0141 0143 0228 CTC Clatronic 0144 Cybertron 0143 Daewoo 0128 0141 0142 0149 0154 0155 0169 0179 0206 0228 0229 Dainichi 0143 0228 Dansai 0140 0149 0152 0155 0228 0229 Dantax 0125 0152 Dawa 0155 Daytron 0142 0154 De Graaf 0145 Decca 0141 0149 0152 0155 0229 Denver 0213 0218 Desmet 0149 0152 0155 Diamant 0155 Diamond 0228 Dixi 0142 0149 0152 0154 0155 0229 DTS 0142 0154 Dual 0141 0155 0229 Dual Tec 0141 0142 Dumont 0138 0141 0144 0229 Dux 0152 Dynatron 0149 0152 0155 Elbe 0125 0133 0155 0229 Elcit 0138 Electa 0151 ELECTRO TECH 0142 Elin 0141 0149 0152 0154 0155 0228 Elite 0143 0149 0155 Elman 0144 Elta 0142 0154 0228 Emerson 0125
20. 0138 0155 Epson 0216 Erres 0149 0152 0155 ESC 0229 Etron 0142 Eurofeel 0229 0140 Euroline 0152 Euroman 0125 0140 0141 0149 0155 0228 0229 Europhon 0141 0144 0149 0155 0228 0229 Expert 0156 Exquisit 0155 Fenner 0142 0154 Ferguson 0148 0152 0153 0157 Fidelity 0141 0145 0155 0228 Filsai 0229 Finlandia 0145 Finlux 0132 0138 0141 0144 0149 0152 0155 0229 Firstline 0141 0142 0149 0154 0155 0228 0229 Fisher 0125 0138 0141 0147 0150 0229 Flint 0149 0155 Formenti 0132 0138 0139 0141 0152 0228 Formenti Phoenix 0228 Fortress 0138 0139 Fraba 0125 0155 Friac 0125 Frontech 0140 0142 0145 0146 0154 0229 Fujitsu 0229 Fujitsu General 0229 Funai 0140 Galaxi 0155 0150 Galaxis 0125 0155 GBC 0142 0147 0154 Geant Casino 0156 GEC 0141 0146 0149 0152 0155 0229 Geloso 0142 0145 0154 General Technic 0142 0154 Genexxa 0143 0146 0149 0155 Giant 0229 GoldHand 0228 Goldline 0155 Goldstar 0125 0141 0142 0145 0149 0152 0154 0155 0228 0229 Goodmans 0140 0142 0147 0149 0152 0154 0155 0222 0229 Gorenje 0125 0150 GPM 0143 Graetz 0146 Granada 0132 0141 0145 0147 0149 0152 0155 0156 0229 Grandin 0142 0143 0151 0152 Gronic 0229 Grundig 0124 0125 0132 0155 0162 Halifax 0140 0141 0228 0229 Hampton 0141 0228 0229 Hanseatic 0125 0133 0141 0142 0147 0149 0152 0154 0155 0229 Hantarex 0142 0154
21. 0142 0149 0154 0155 0229 New World 0143 Nicamagic 0141 0228 Nikkai 0140 0141 0143 0149 0152 0154 0155 0228 0229 Nobliko 0132 0141 0144 0228 Nokia 0146 Nordic 0229 Nordmende 0138 0146 0148 0149 Nordvision 0152 Novatronic 0155 Oceanic 0146 0156 Okano 0125 0150 0155 ONCEAS 0141 Opera 0155 Orbit 0149 0155 Orion 0142 0149 0152 0154 0155 0194 Orline 0155 Osaki 0140 0141 0143 0155 0229 Oso 0143 Otto Versand 0139 0141 0147 0149 0151 0152 0155 0229 Pael 0141 0228 Palladium 0125 0141 0150 0155 0229 Palsonic 0229 Panama 0140 0141 0142 0154 0155 0228 0229 Panasonic 0123 0146 0155 0158 0164 0214 0217 Panavision 0155 Pathe Cinema 0125 0133 0141 0156 0228 Pausa 0142 0154 Perdio 0155 0228 Perfekt 0155 Philco 0125 0132 0138 0155 Philharmonic 0141 0229 Philips 0115 0117 0138 0141 0149 0152 0155 0160 0163 0165 0170 0171 0173 0174 0182 0183 0195 0196 0202 0205 0212 0215 Phoenix 0125 0138 0149 0152 0155 0228 Phonola 0138 0149 0152 0155 0228 Plantron 0140 0149 0154 0155 Playsonic 0229 Poppy 0142 0154 Prandoni Prince 0132 0145 Precision 0141 0229 Prima 0142 0146 0154 Profex 0142 0154 Profi Tronic 0149 0155 Proline 0149 0155 Prosonic 0125 0141 0152 0155 0228 0229 0297 Protech 0140 0141 0142 0144 0149 0152 0229 Provision 0152 0155 Pye 0149 0152 0155 0198 Pymi 0142 0154 Quand
22. 0172 0185 0188 0197 0201 0211 0225 0227 Sound amp Vision 0143 0144 Soundwave 0149 0152 0155 Standard 0141 0142 0143 0149 0154 0155 0229 Starlight 0152 Starlite 0154 0155 Stenway 0151 Stern 0145 0146 Strato 0154 0155 Stylandia 0229 Sunkai 0142 Sunstar 0154 0155 Sunwood 0142 0149 0154 0155 Superla 0141 0228 0229 SuperTech 0154 0155 0228 Supra 0142 0154 Susumu 0143 Sutron 0142 0154 Sydney 0141 0228 0229 Sysline 0152 Sytong 0228 Tandy 0139 0141 0143 0146 0229 Tashiko 0144 0145 0147 0228 0229 Tatung 0141 0149 0152 0155 0229 TCL 0308 TCM 0140 0142 Teac 0155 0229 Tec 0141 0142 0154 0229 TEDELEX 0229 Teleavia 0148 Telecor 0155 0229 Telefunken 0148 0149 0155 0157 Telegazi 0155 Telemeister 0155 Telesonic 0155 Telestar 0155 Teletech 0142 0152 0154 0155 Teleton 0141 0229 Televideon 0228 Televiso 0156 Tensai 0142 0143 0149 0154 0155 0229 Tesmet 0149 Tevion 0140 0142 Texet 0141 0154 0228 0229 Thomson 0121 0122 0141 0148 0149 0153 0155 0157 0159 0210 Thorn 0152 0155 Tokai 0149 0155 0229 Tokyo 0141 0228 Tomashi 0151 Toshiba 0126 0127 0147 0176 0209 0229 Towada 0146 0229 Trakton 0229 Trans Continens 0155 0229 Transtec 0228 Trident 0229 Triumph 0155 Vestel 0145 0146 0149 0150 0152 0155 0229 VideoSystem 0149 0155 Videotechnic 0228 0229 Viewsonic 0223 Visiola 0141 0228 Vision 0149 01
23. 1040 1050 Otto Versand 1039 Palladium 1034 1038 1040 1050 Panasonic 1043 Pathe Marconi 1034 Perdio 1033 Philco 1050 Philips 1039 1045 1052 Phonola 1039 Portland 1036 1037 1051 Prinz 1033 Profex 1040 Proline 1033 Prosonic 1035 1051 Pye 1039 Quelle 1033 1039 Radialva 1050 Radiola 1039 Rex 1034 RFT 1037 1039 1050 Goldstar 5040 Hitachi 5042 Kenwood 5020 5021 5031 Luxman 5049 Marantz 5033 Onkyo 5017 5018 5030 5050 Additional information Roadstar 1036 1038 1040 1050 1051 Royal 1050 Saba 1034 Saisho 1035 1040 Samsung 1041 Samurai 1037 1050 Sansui 1034 Saville 1051 SBR 1039 Schaub Lorenz 1033 1034 Schneider 1033 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1050 1051 SEG 1040 1050 1051 SEl Sinudyne 1039 Seleco 1034 Sentra 1037 1050 Sentron 1040 1050 Sharp 1042 Shintom 1040 1050 Shivaki 1038 Siemens 1038 Silva 1038 Silver 1051 Sinudyne 1039 Solavox 1037 Sonneclair 1050 Sonoko 1036 1051 Sontec 1038 Sony 1044 Standard 1036 1051 Stern 1051 Sunkai 1035 Sunstar 1033 Panasonic 5036 Philips 5022 5032 5044 RCA 5013 5029 Roadstar 5052 Sharp 5051 Sony 5012 5023 5026 5027 5028 5039 Suntronic 1033 Sunwood 1040 1050 Symphonic 1050 Taisho 1035 Tandberg 1051 Tashiko 1033 Tatung 1033 1034 1039 TCM 1035 Teac 1051 Tec 1037 1050 1051 Teleavia 1034 Telefunken 1034 Teletech 1050 1051 Tenosal 1040 1050 Tensai 1033 1038 1
24. 3 USES OO PL Il Music Options Dimension 0 Default system settings Eigen OFF Setting Default Neo X CINEMA 1 0 BP Neo X Options Center Gain Neo X MUSIC 0 3 Digital Video Converter OFF Neo X GAME 1 0 SPEAKERS SB FH ON X PL ilz Options Height Gain MID Speaker System Normal SB FH Listening Mode 2 ch multi ch AUTO SURROUND Front SMALL All Inputs EE I I OO EI Listening Mode Headphones STEREO Center SMALL See also Setting the Audio options on page 67 for other default DSP settings FH FW SMALL Speaker Setting LLL MCACC Surr SMALL MCACC Position Memory M1 MEMORY 1 ob SMALLx2 Channel Level M1 to M6 0 0 dB SW YES Speaker Distance M1 to M6 3 00m Surround Position ON SIDE D a OO OOOO ATT of all channels filters 0 0 dB Crossover 80Hz Standing Wave M1 to M6 M SWch Wide Trim 0 0 dB X Curve OFF _ All channels bands 0 0 dB DIMMER Medium bright EQ Data M1 to M6 E EQ Wide Trim 0 0 dB Inputs See Input function default and possible setting page 39 hh ee Input function default and possible settings on page 39 Network Standby OFF Input Volume Absorber All Inputs OdB DHCP ON HDMI HDMI Audio AMP Control OFF Control Mode OFF ARC Audio Return Channel OFF POLS AUTO Standby Through OFF DSP Power On Level LAST Volume Limit OFF Mute Level FULL Controlling the rest of your system About the Remote Setup MeNU 00 0 an in inline nh nnn nnn nnn nnn nnn nnn nnn nnn nn nn nn n
25. 4 410 4 gt Default 0 Using other functions What it does This improves elements that reduce picture quality mainly noticeable in network contents such as mosquito noise and block noise When AUTO is selected this unit s Stream Smoother function automatically turns on when network contents are played on the player supporting Stream Smoother Link and connected to this unit by HDMI assuming that integrated operation with the Control with HDMI function is set Stream Smoother Link Sets the optimum picture quality for the type of monitor that is con nected Select PDP for plasma displays LCD for liquid crystal moni tors FPJ for front projectors PRO for professional monitors If you want to adjust the picture quality settings to your personal tastes select MEMORY Reduces noise in the luminance Y signal The image is only an example for checking the effect Reduces noise in the input s color C signal The image is only an example for checking the effect Reduces block noise block shaped distortion generated upon MPEG compression in the picture The image is only an example for checking the effect Reduces mosquito noise distortion generated at the contours of the picture upon MPEG compression in the picture The image is only an example for checking the effect Option s OFF ON AUTO PDP LCD FPJ PRO MEMORY 4010 8 Default 0 4010 8 Default 0 4010 8 D
26. 58 e Media server See Playing back audio files stored on components on the network on page 59 e Favorites See Playing back your favorite songs on page 59 Basic playback controls You can perform the following operations with the remote control of this receiver Note that some buttons are not available for operation depending on the category currently being played back e Press NET to switch the remote control to the network operation mode H mn o lt 2 7 v E eO 7 Notes e While a DSD file is being played lt lt and gt gt are disabled e When input is MEDIA SERVER or FAVORITES the following action is taken depending on the server or file II may not work lt lt and gt gt may not work or may take the same action as I and P e When input is MEDIA SERVER by pressing TOOLS on the list display screen you can switch the displayed titles in alphabetical order or track order Listening to Internet radio stations Internet radio is an audio broadcasting service transmitted via the Internet There are a large number of Internet radio stations broadcasting a variety of services from every corner of the world Some are hosted managed and broadcast by private individuals while others are by the corresponding traditional terrestrial radio stations or radio networks Whereas terrestrial or OTA over the air radio stations are geographically restricted on the range of radio waves broadcast f
27. HD High Resolution Audio A high definition audio technology by which signals can be transferred over HDMI cables DTS ES DTS ES the ES stands for Extended Surround is a decoder that is capable of decoding both DTS ES Discrete 6 1 and DTS ES Matrix 6 1 encoded sources DTS Neo X DTS Neo X can generate 11 1 channel surround sound from any matrixed stereo source such as video or TV and from 5 1 channel sources Decoding A technology for converting digital signals that have been compressed upon recording by a digital signal process ing circuit etc into the original signals The term decoding or matrix decoding is also used for the technol ogy which converts 2 channel sound sources into multiple channels or expands 5 1 channel signals into 6 1 or 1 1 channels Calibrating the sound field Improving the sound quality Phase Control The Phase Control technology incorporated into this receiver s design provides coherent sound reproduction through the use of phase matching for an optimal sound image at your listening position Virtual Speakers Virtual playback of a maximum of 11 2 channels combining the actually installed speakers and the virtual speak ers is possible This makes for smoother connection between the sounds and an improved 3D feel Virtual Surround Back When you re not using surround back speakers selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual surround back channel through your surround speakers You can choose to
28. Lenco 0142 0154 Lenoir 0141 0142 0154 Leyco 0140 0149 0152 0155 LG 0125 0136 0141 0142 0145 0149 0152 0154 0155 0186 0189 0196 0220 0228 0229 LG GoldStar 0129 Liesenk 0152 Liesenkotter 0155 Life 0140 0142 Lifetec 0140 0142 0154 0155 Lloyds 0154 Loewe 0125 0133 0155 0166 0167 Loewe Opta 0138 0149 0152 Luma 0145 0152 0154 0155 Lumatron 0145 0149 0152 0155 0229 Lux May 0149 Luxor 0141 0145 0229 M Electronic 0141 0142 0146 0148 0149 0152 Magnadyne 0138 0144 0152 Magnafon 0132 0141 0144 0228 Magnum 0140 0142 Mandor 0140 Manesth 0140 0141 0149 0152 0155 0229 Marantz 0149 0152 0155 Marelli 0138 Mark 0149 0152 0154 0155 0228 0229 Masuda 0229 Matsui 0141 0142 0145 0147 0149 0152 0154 0155 0229 Mediator 0149 0152 0155 Medion 0140 0142 0155 M Electronic 0154 0155 0228 0229 Melvox 0156 Memorex 0142 0154 Memphis 0142 0154 Mercury 0154 0155 Metz 0138 0299 0300 0301 0302 Micromaxx 0140 0142 Microstar 0140 0142 Minerva 0132 Minoka 0149 0155 Mitsubishi 0138 0147 0149 0155 0200 Mivar 0125 0132 0133 0141 0228 0229 Motion 0132 MTC 0125 0228 Multi System 0152 Multitech 0125 0141 0142 0144 0145 0147 0152 0154 0155 0228 0229 Murphy 0141 0228 Naonis 0145 NEC 0147 0229 Neckermann 0125 0138 0141 0145 0149 0150 0152 0155 0229 NEI 0149 0152 0155 Neufunk 0154 0155 New Tech
29. Logic II or ib Neo X itatwo channel soundtrack is currently playing including Dolby Surround encoded The HDMI indicator blinks continu Check all the points below does not appear on the receiver then this is not a malfunction Check the disc packaging for details about the audio ously tracks available Video audio is not output or is inter This receiver is HDCP compatible Check that the components you are connecting are During playback of DVD Audio the This will occur when playing DVD Audio material over the HDMI connection This is not rupted also HDCP compatible If they are not please connect them using the component or display shows PCM a malfunction composite video jacks The power turns off automatically See the Power section page 98 Depending on the connected source component it s possible that it will not work with and some indicator flashes or some this receiver even if it is HDCP compatible In this case connect using the component indicator flashes and the power does or composite video jacks between source and receiver not turn on If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support Remote control If video images do not appear on your TV try adjusting the resolution Deep Color or other setting for your component Symptom Remedy While analog video signals are being output over H
30. MCACC menu you can specify the MCACC preset where you want to save the SYMMETRY ALL CH ADJ and FRONT ALIGN settings EQ of subwoofer is automatically set when in ALL CH ADJ mode e STAND WAVE Multi Point only available when the Auto MCACC Menu above is EQ Pro amp S Wave In addition to measurements at the listening position you can use two more reference points for which test tones will be analyzed for standing waves This is useful if you want to get a balanced flat calibration for sev eral seating positions in your listening area Place the microphone at the reference point indicated on screen and note that the last microphone placement will be at your main listening position 3rd reference point 2nd reference Main listening position 3 Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC jack on the front panel Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone Microphone Tripod If you have a tripod use it to place the microphone so that it s about ear level at your normal listening position If you do not have a tripod use some other object to install the microphone e t may not be possible to measure correctly if the microphone is placed on a table sofa etc 4 When you re finished setting the options select START then press ENTER 5 Follow the instructions on screen 6 Wait for the Auto MCACC Setup to finish outputting te
31. Mode Setup on page 40 See About network playback on page 60 AVNavigator AirPlay See How to use the built in AVNavigator on page 36 See Using AirPlay on iPod touch iPhone iPad and iTunes on page 56 ECO MODE 1 2 Wireless LAN See Using the Advanced surround effects on page 53 See Connecting to a wireless LAN on page 33 HDZONE Playback High Resolution audio file See MULTI ZONE setup on page 30 See About playable file formats on page 61 1 HTC Connect ui Playing a USB device on page 45 See About HTC Connect on page 57 Slideshow 1 Pandora See Playing back photo files stored on a USB memory device on page 45 See Listening to Pandora Internet Radio on page 58 Bluetooth ADAPTER 1 Play ZONE See Music playback using Bluetooth wireless technology on page 48 See Play ZONE Setup on page 94 ARC Audio Return Channel 4K pass through up scaling See HDMI Setup on page 63 See About HDMI on page 23 Auto delay Full Auto MCACC See Setting the Audio options on page 67 See Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC on page 37 Height Gain Dolby Pro Logic llz Height option Automatic MCACC Expert See Setting the Audio options on page 67 See Automatic MCACC Expert on page 82 Virtual Surround Back Manual MCACC setup see Setting the Audio options on page 67 See Manual MCACC setup on page 84 Virtual Height PQLS see Setting the Audio options on page 67 See Setting the PQLS function on page 64 Virtua
32. Press AUTO AUTO SURR ALC STREAM DIRECT to select AUTO SURROUND and start playback of the source For such sound sources as Dolby TrueHD and DTS HD the surround sound is played With stereo sound the sound is played from the left and right front speakers with the default listening mode To play a stereo sound source in multichannel press SURR or ADV to select your favorite listening mode Example Press ADV several times to select EXT STEREO e You may need to check the digital audio output settings on your DVD player or digital satellite receiver It should be set to output Dolby Digital DTS and 88 2 kHz 96 kHz PCM 2 channel audio and if there is an MPEG audio option set this to convert the MPEG audio to PCM e See also Listening to your system on page 51 for information on different ways of listening to sources It is possible to check on the front panel display whether or not multi channel playback is being performed prop erly For details see Auto Surround ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal formats on page 110 When multi channel speakers more than the two front left and right channels are connected straight decoding is performed so the input signal s format name for example I1 TrueHD DTS HD MSTR or DTS HD HI RES is displayed If the display does not correspond to the input signal and listening mode check the connections and settings 4 Use the VOLUME to adjust the volume level Turn down the volu
33. Systems 0155 Acme 0141 Acura 0142 0154 ADC 0140 Admiral 0138 0139 0140 0145 0146 Adyson 0141 0228 0229 Agashi 0228 0229 Agazi 0140 Aiko 0141 0142 0154 0155 0228 0229 Aim 0155 Aiwa 0199 Akai 0142 0143 0149 0152 0154 0155 0228 0229 Akiba 0143 0155 Akura 0140 0143 0154 0155 Alaron 0228 Alba 0125 0141 0142 0143 0147 0150 0152 0154 0155 0190 0193 0203 0228 Alcyon 0132 Allorgan 0229 Allstar 0149 0155 AMOi 0224 Amplivision 0125 0141 0156 0229 Amstrad 0140 0142 0143 0154 0155 Anam 0142 Anglo 0142 0154 Anitech 0132 0140 0142 0154 0155 Ansonic 0125 0133 0142 0144 0154 0155 Arcam 0228 0229 Arcam Delta 0141 Aristona 0149 0152 0155 Arthur Martin 0156 ASA 0138 0146 Asberg 0132 0149 0155 Astra 0142 Asuka 0140 0141 0143 0228 0229 Atlantic 0141 0149 0152 0155 0228 Atori 0142 0154 Auchan 0156 Audiosonic 0125 0141 0142 0143 0149 0152 0155 0229 AudioTon 0125 0141 0229 Ausind 0132 Autovox 0132 0138 0140 0141 0229 Awa 0228 0229 Baird 0229 Bang amp Olufsen 0138 0230 Basic Line 0142 0143 0149 0154 0155 0229 Bastide 0141 0229 Baur 0152 0155 Bazin 0229 Beko 0125 0150 0155 0175 Benq 0219 Beon 0149 0152 0155 Best 0125 Bestar 0125 0149 0155 Binatone 0141 0229 Blue Sky 0143 0155 Blue Star 0151 Boots 0141 0229 BPL 0151 0155 Brandt 0148 0153 0157 0159 Brinkmann 0155 Brionvega
34. The video converter ensures that all video sources are output through the HDMI OUT terminal If the TV is only connected to the receiver s composite VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks all the other video devices must be connected through composite connections If several video components are assigned to the same input function see The Input Setup menu on page 39 the converter gives priority to HDMI component then composite in that order Terminal for connection with TV monitor Terminal for connection with source device HDMI IN HDMI OUT Y PB PR COMPONENT VIDEO IN VIDEO IN High picture quality f Video signals can be output VIDEO MONITOR OUT G Notes e With factory default settings video from the video cable or component cable will not be output from the HDMI terminal To output video you must switch video input to the device connected with the video cable or compo nent cable and set V CONV to ON page 69 e The only exception is HDMI since this resolution cannot be downsampled you must connect your monitor TV to the receiver s HDMI output when connecting this video source e fthe video signal does not appear on your TV try adjusting the resolution settings on your component or dis play Note that some components such as video game units have resolutions that may not be converted In this case try switching Digital Video Conversion in Setting the Video options on page 69 OFF e he signal input resolutions
35. Tocancel the preset setup mode press RCU SETUP 2 Press the input function button for the component you want to control The LED blinks once and flashes continuously 3 Point the two remote controls towards each other then press the button that will be doing the learning on this receiver s remote control The LED flashes once then stops flashing remaining lit e The remote controls should be 3 cm apart JO 0 0 00 qoC lt fial tet UD O 3 cm dd gUoo doc Other remote control This receiver s remote control 4 Press the corresponding button on the other remote control that is sending teaching the signal to this receiver s remote control If the LED lights for one second and continues to flash the setting has been successfully completed e fthe LED flashes for five seconds it means the memory is full See Erasing all learnt settings that are in one i input function on page 78 to erase a programmed button you re not using to free up more memory note a that some signals may take more memory than others e Note that interference from TVs or other devices will sometimes result in the remote control learning the wrong signal e Some commands from other remote controls cannot be learned but in most cases the remotes just need to be moved closer together or farther apart 5 To program ad
36. and playback components support the Control with HDMI feature the convenient Control with HDMI functions can be used see Control with HDMI function on page 62 HDMI DVI compatible monitor HDMI DVI compatible Other HDMI DVI This connection is required in Blu ray Disc player order to listen to the sound of EUNDDSO COMPONEN the TV over the receiver O ES 0 iM HDMI OUT HDMI OUT Select one AUDIO OUT DIGITAL OUT R ANALOG L COAXIAL OPTICAL HDMI IN TICAL IN El TV ASSIGNABLE COAXIAL IN El DVD ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE AUDIO e When connecting to an HDMI DVI compatible monitor using the HDMI OUT 2 terminal switch the HDMI output setting to OUT 2 or OUT 1 2 See Switching the HDMI output on page 71 Also MAIN HDZONE must be set to MAIN beforehand page 94 e For input components connections other than HDMI connections are also possible see Connecting your DVD player with no HDMI output on page 25 e f you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the receiver connect the receiver and TV with audio cables Connecting your equipment e With factory default settings video from the video cable or component cable will not be output from the HDMI terminal To output video you must switch video input to the device connected with the video cable or compo Connecting your DVD player with no HDM
37. between player and PC is recommended e f several clients are playing simultaneously as the case may be playback is interrupted or stalled e Depending on the security software installed on a connected PC and the setting of such software network connection may be blocked Pioneer is not responsible for any malfunction of the player and or the NETWORK features due to communica tion error malfunctions associated with your network connection and or your PC or other connected equipment Please contact your PC manufacturer or Internet service provider This product includes technology owned by Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used or distributed without a license from Microsoft Licensing Inc Microsoft Windows Windows Media and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries About playable file formats The NETWORK feature of this receiver supports the following file formats Note that some file formats are not available for playback although they are listed as playable file formats Also the compatibility of file formats var ies depending on the type of server Check with your server to ensure the compatibility of file formats supported by your server e nternet radio playback may be affected by the Internet communications environment and in this case play back may not be possible even with the file formats listed here e With MP3 WAV AAC F
38. broadcast stations not on the vTuner list from the special Pioneer site With the receiver broadcast stations not included on the list of station distributed by vTuner can be registered and played Check the access code required for registration on the receiver use this access code to access the special Pioneer Internet radio site and register the desired broadcast stations in your favorites The address of the special Pioneer Internet radio site is http www radio pioneer com 1 Display the Internet Radio list screen To display the Internet Radio list screen perform step 1 at Playback with Network functions on page 57 2 Use f 4 to select Help then press ENTER 3 Use 1 4 to select Get access code then press ENTER The access code required for registration on the special Pioneer Internet radio site is displayed Make a memo of this address The following can be checked on the Help screen e Get access code he access code required for registration on the special Pioneer Internet radio site is displayed e Show Your WebID PW After registering on the special Pioneer Internet radio site the registered ID and password are displayed Reset Your WebID PW Resets all the information registered on the special Pioneer Internet radio site When reset all the registered broadcast stations are also cleared If you want to listen to the same stations re register after resetting 4 Access the special Pioneer Internet radio site
39. can raise or lower channel levels using test tones with the TRIM feature Use to tion using this setup will alter the settings you made in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full select TRIM then use to raise or lower the channel level for the current speaker Auto MCACC on page 37 or Automatic MCACC Expert on page 82 and is not necessary if you re satis You cannot select 63Hz for the channel which is set to SMALL using Speaker Setting fied with these settings e he frequencies that can be adjusted by the SW channel are 31Hz 63Hz 125Hz and 250Hz e Depending on the crossover frequency setting some frequencies are less effective 3 Ifyou selected Reverb Measurement select EQ ON or EQ OFF and then START The following options determine how the reverb characteristics of your listening area are displayed in Reverb View e EQ OFF You will see the reverb characteristics of your listening area without the equalization performed by this receiver before calibration e EQ ON You will see the reverb characteristics of your listening area with the equalization performed by this receiver after calibration Note that the EQ response may not appear entirely flat due to adjustments neces sary for your listening area The calibration corresponding to the currently selected MCACC preset will be used when EQ ON is selected To use another MCACC preset press MCACC to select the MCACC memory you want to store
40. control plus correc tion value gt Input source to be played in ZONE 2 gt Input source to be played in HDZONE gt HDMI output setting Subzone to which HDZONE is output For some settings some items are not displayed 3 When you re finished press STATUS again to switch off the display 3 Input the receiver s IP address into the browser s address input field Access the IP address http the receiver s IP address from a web browser You can display the IP address of the unit on the unit s display by pressing the STATUS button on the remote control When connected with the receiver the AVNavigator menu screen appears in the browser 4 Onthe AVNavigator menu screen select Network Setup 5 Select the item you want to set Using the sleep timer The sleep timer switches the receiver into standby after a specified amount of time so you can fall asleep without worrying about the receiver being left on all night Use the remote control to set the sleep timer Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the sleep time min 60 min Nu Off 90 min e You can check the remaining sleep time at any time by pressing SLEEP once Pressing repeatedly will cycle through the sleep options again e he sleep timer is valid for all zones If any zone is on the sleep timer continues functioning Dimming the display You can choose between four brightness levels for the front panel display Note that when selecting source
41. data is sent from the broadcast station e f you see NO PS DATA in the PS display it means no PS data can be received e f you see NO PTY DATA in the PTY display it means no PTY data can be received Press DISP for RDS information Each press changes the display as follows e Radio Text RT Messages sent by the radio station For example a talk radio station may provide a phone number as RT e Program Service Name PS The name of the radio station e Program Type PTY This indicates the kind of program currently being broadcast e Current tuner frequency Basic playback Music playback using Bluetooth wireless technology Device not equipped with bluetooth wireless technology Digital music player bluetooth wireless technology enabled device B uetooth audio transmitter Digital music player sold commercially bluetooth wireless technology enabled device cell phone Y bo y L wv Music data vw v This receiver Remote control operation 3 The unit is capable of playing back music stored on B uetooth capable devices cell phones digital music players etc wirelessly You can also use a bluetooth audio transmitter sold separately to enjoy music from devices that do not have Bluetooth functionality Please refer to the user s manual for your bluetooth capable device for more details A Notes e The Bluetooth wireless technology enabl
42. e SP SBON Surround back channels are added to the front center and surround channels maximum 5 channels and a maximum of 7 channels are output e SP FH ON Front height channels are added to the front center and surround channels maximum 5 chan nels and a maximum of 7 channels are output e SP OFF No sound is output from the speakers When you select Normal SB FW you can select from e SP SB FW ON Surround back or front wide channels are added to the front center and surround channels maximum 5 channels and a maximum of 7 channels are output The surround back and front wide channels are switched automatically according to the audio input signal e SP SB ON Surround back channels are added to the front center and surround channels maximum 5 channels and a maximum of 7 channels are output e SP FWON Front wide channels are added to the front center and surround channels maximum 5 chan nels and a maximum of 7 channels are output e SP OFF No sound is output from the speakers When you select Speaker B you can select from e SP AON Sound is output from the A speaker terminals up to 7 channels including surround back chan nels depending on the source e SP BON Sound is output from the two speakers connected to the B speaker terminals Multichannel sources will not be heard e SP A B ON Sound is output from the A speaker terminals up to 5 channels depending on the source the two speakers con
43. fT to select a character to set the position and ENTER to confirm your selection 6 Enter the port number of your proxy server Use f to select a character to set the position and ENTER to confirm your selection 7 Select OK to confirm the IP Address Proxy setup Network Standby This setting allows the AVNavigator function for operating the receiver from a computer connected on the same LAN as the receiver to be used even when the receiver is in the standby mode 1 Select Network Standby from the Network Setup menu 2 Specify whether the Network Standby is ON or OFF e ON Even when the receiver is in standby mode the power can be turned on from an external application iControlAV5 etc on a device connected to the network e OFF The AVNavigator function cannot be used when the receiver is in the standby mode This lets you reduce power consumption in the standby mode Friendly Name 1 Select Friendly Name from the Network Setup menu 2 Select Edit Name then select Rename If after changing the name you want to restore the name to the default select Default 3 Input the name you want Use to select a character to set the position and ENTER to confirm your selection Parental Lock Set restrictions for using Internet services Also set the password accompanying the usage restrictions e Upon shipment from the factory the password is set to 0000 am
44. for compatibility and may not work HTC Connect has been tested with MP3 AAC WMA and WAV encoding for mats Other formats may not be compatible 4 High network congestion may interfere with the operation of HTC Connect HTC Connect Certified Smartphones The HIC Connect compatible smartphones Please check Pioneer website for up to date information about com patible devices and audio format support http www pioneerelectronics com htc for USA http www pioneerelectronics ca htc for Canada ae Notes e Specifications and design subject to modification without notice e HIC HIC Connect and the HTC Connect logo are trademarks of HTC Corporation Playback with Network functions amp Important e About one minute is required between turning the power on and completion of startup e When you play back audio files Connecting is displayed before playback starts The display may continue for several seconds depending on the type of file e n case a domain is configured in a Windows network environment you cannot access a PC on the network while you are logged onto the domain Instead of logging onto the domain log onto the local machine e There are cases where the time elapsed may not be correctly displayed 1 Press NET repeatedly to select the category you want to play back It may take several seconds for this receiver to access the network Select a category from the following list INTERNET RADIO Inte
45. from your computer and perform the registration process http www radio pioneer com Access the above site and use the access code in step 3 to perform user registration following the instructions on the screen 5 Register the desired broadcast stations as your favorites following the instructions on the computer s screen Both broadcast stations not on the vIuner list and stations on the vTuner list can be registered In this case they are registered on the receiver as favorite broadcast stations and can be played Playback with NETWORK features Listening to Pandora Internet Radio For Australian Model Only Pandora is personalized internet radio that is designed to help you discover new music you ll love mixed in with music you already know For details check the website http www pandora com e You must have a registered account in order to listen to songs using Pandora Internet Radio Select PANDORA then follow the instructions on the screen to make the account settings e See the Pandora website for regions in which the Pandora service is offered e Some functions may be changed at Pandora s discretion A Notes e When disposing of the product we recommend you reset it to delete the data See Resetting the system on page 7 4 e Pandora the leading internet radio service gives people music they love anytime anywhere through personal ized radio stations Inputting characters using the software keyboard
46. how to operate the remote control for the receiver stanpayion SOURCE ELO INO Ih 13 RECEIVER SUB ZONE CONTROL MAIN 14 SOURCE CONTROL Css C sm eon USB ADPT ROKU ET four LISTENING MODE 9 uro sume aov 519 MPX BAND PTY La PRESET TUNE 10 CJ CJ GJ e X 6 C9 C c C Ce 2 e D ACCESS CLASS Sae DIMMER SLEEP RCU SETUP SMa 1S 7 11 12 17 Pioneer RECEIVER The remote has been conveniently color coded according to component control using the following system e White Receiver control TV control e Blue Operation of other devices and each input TUNER etc See pages 44 45 47 48 and 79 1 OSTANDBY ON This switches between standby and on for this receiver 2 ALLZONE STBY Use this button to perform unique operations page 78 3 MAIN RECEIVER Switches the remote to control the receiver used to select the white commands Switch to perform operations in the main zone 4 SOURCE CONTROL buttons owitches the input Also switches remote control operation mode for operating other devices or each input TUNER etc page 6 The input for HDMI NET and ALL switches each time these buttons are pressed 5 TVcontrol buttons These buttons can be used to perform operations on the TV to which the TV INPUT button is assigned The TV can be operated wi
47. indicator in the front panel display blinks during this process and you can turn on this receiver once it has stopped blinking When you set the Control with HDMI to OFF you can skip this process For details about the Control with HDMI feature see Control with HDMI function on page 62 e To get the most out of this function we recommend that you connect your HDMI component not to a TV but rather directly to the HDMI terminal on this receiver e The Control with HDMI function can be used with a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 terminal but not with a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 2 terminal HDMI Setup You must adjust the settings of this receiver as well as the connected Control with HDMI compatible compo nents in order to make use of the Control with HDMI function For more information see the operating instruc tions for each component 1 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode and then press HOME MENU 2 Select System Setup then press ENTER 3 Select HDMI Setup then press ENTER 4 Select the Control setting you want Choose whether to set this unit s Control with HDMI function ON or OFF You will need to set it to ON to use the Control with HDMI function When using a component that does not support the Control with HDMI function set this to OFF e ON Enables the Control with HDMI function Set Control Mode ARC and PQLS in the subsequent setting items to the desir
48. input signal is a 3D signal the on screen display may not be displayed e The size of the characters displayed differs according to the output resolution Play ZONE Setup Select the zone for playing the audio contents of devices in the home network when using in the DMR mode e For playable DLNA compatible network devices see page 56 1 Select Play ZONE Setup from the Other Setup menu 2 Select the zone in which you want to play the audio contents 3 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Other Setup menu ip Note If another zone is on it may not be possible to play the audio contents In this case turn the other zone off then play the audio contents Making network settings using Safari 1 Launch Safari on your computer 2 Press Bookmark icon Click Bonjour list a and then select this receiver s name Friendly Name b in Bookmark If Bonjour list is not displayed access the IP address http the receiver s IP address from Safari 3 On the AVNavigator menu screen select Network Setup AVNavigator M ar OEPS 4 Click IP Proxy Setting 5 Setup the network settings manually and then press Apply WRITE TW os c 119 A Note This setting for the network has been confirmed for Mac OS X 10 7 and Safari 5 1 The System Setup and Other Setup menus Using Safari to set a friendly name 1 Launch Safari on your computer 2 Pres
49. or AM if necessary 3 Tune to a station There are three ways to do this e Automatic tuning o search for stations in the currently selected band press and hold TUNE for about a second The receiver will start searching for the next station stopping when it has found one Repeat to search for other stations e Manual tuning o change the frequency one step at a time press TUNE e High speed tuning Press and hold TUNE for high speed tuning Release the button at the frequency you want Improving FM sound If the TUNED or STEREO indicator doesn t light when tuning to an FM station because the signal is weak press MPX to switch the receiver into mono reception mode This should improve the sound quality and allow you to enjoy the broadcast Tuning directly to a station Press TUNER to select the tuner Use BAND to change the band FM or AM if necessary Press D ACCESS Direct Access Use the number buttons to enter the frequency of the radio station For example to tune to 106 00 FM press 1 0 6 0 0 If you make a mistake halfway through press D ACCESS twice to cancel the frequency and start over A W N a Saving station presets If you often listen to a particular radio station it s convenient to have the receiver store the frequency for easy recall whenever you want to listen to that station This saves the effort of manually tuning in each time This receiver can memorize up to 63 stations s
50. play audio and photo files by connecting USB devices to this receiver Proneer 3 8 pum a eee eee eee e USB mass storage device Switch the receiver into standby then connect your USB device to the USB terminal on the front panel of this receiver e This receiver does not support a USB hub e For instructions on playing the USB device see Playing a USB device on page 45 Connecting your equipment Connecting an MHL compatible device Connecting to a wireless LAN An MHL compatible mobile device can be connected to enjoy 3D Full HD videos high quality multi channel Wireless connection to the network is possible through a wireless LAN connection Use the separately sold audio and photos etc with charge the battery on the receiver Use the MHL cable to connect the device AS WL800 for connection e Use only the furnished accessory connecting cable e Certain settings are required to use a wireless LAN converter AS WL300 For instructions on making these settings see the operating instructions included with the wireless LAN converter AS WL300 IN MHL PON OUTPUT 5 V 2 0 9 A MAX LAN 10 100 DC OUTPUT AE for WIRELESS LAN Internet MHL cable MHL enabled device Switch the receiver into standby then use the MHL cable to connect your MHL enabled device to the MHL terminal on the rear panel of this receiver e To automatically swi
51. procedure is only possible if the receiver is connected to the Internet Updating via a USB memory device is performed by downloading the update file from a computer reading this file onto a USB memory device then inserting this USB memory device into the USB port on the receiver s front panel With this procedure the USB memory device containing the update file must first be inserted into the USB port on the receiver s front panel The System Setup and Other Setup menus e f an update file is provided on the Pioneer website download it onto your computer When downloading an update file from the Pioneer website onto your computer the file will be in ZIP format Unzip the ZIP file before saving it on the USB memory device If there are any old downloaded files or downloaded files for other models on the USB memory device delete them http www pioneer eu eur e f an update file does not exist in the Pioneer s website updating the software for the receiver is not necessary Important e DO NOT unplug the power cord during updating e When updating via the Internet do not disconnect the LAN cable When updating via a USB memory device do not disconnect the USB memory device e f updating is interrupted before it is completed start updating over from the beginning hereceiver s settings may be reset when the software is updated Information on the models for which the settings are reset is provided on the Pioneer website Check the web
52. sources Set the player s audio output to Linear PCM e On players compatible with PQLS 2 ch Audio PQLS only works when playing CDs Please refer to the operating instructions supplied with your player for more information This function is activated when Control is set to ON Tip e The PQLS setting is set at PQLS in HDMI Setup on the HOME MENU but the setting can also be switched with the remote control as described below 1 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode and then press AUDIO P 2 Use f to select PQLS 3 Use to select the PQLS setting The setting is displayed on the front panel display e AUTO PQLS is enabled A precision quartz controller in this receiver eliminates distortion caused by timing errors jitter giving you the best possible digital to analog conversion when you use the HDMI interface This is valid as an HDMI function for POLS compatible players e OFF PQLS is disabled About Sound Retriever Link and Stream Smoother Link These are automatic functions allowing you to output optimum audio and video signals from the receiver using the Control with HDMI function When a player supporting the respective function is connected to the receiver by HDMI the sound picture is optimized for the compressed audio video file played on the player e Depending on the compressed audio video file format it may not be operated automatically Also see the
53. standard for transmitting digital signals with mobile devices MHL can carry high quality multi channel audio data and 3D Full HD video formats The MHL compatible device s video signals are output from the TV connected to the receiver the audio signals are output from the speakers connected to the receiver or TV 1 Press STANDBY ON to switch on the receiver and your TV See Connecting an MHL compatible device on page 33 2 Press MHL on the remote control to switch the receiver to the MHL 3 Select and play the desired contents on the MHL compatible device pp Notes e MHL compatible devices can be operated with the receiver s remote control by pressing the remote control s MHL button but depending on the MHL compatible device being used some buttons may not be operable e o playback from a MHL compatible device connected to the receiver on a TV that is also connected to the receiver the power to the receiver must be turned on Basic playback Listening to the radio The following steps show you how to tune in to FM and AM radio broadcasts using the automatic search and manual step tuning functions If you already know the frequency of the station you want see Tuning directly to a station below Once you are tuned to a station you can memorize the frequency for recall later see Saving station presets on page 47 for more on how to do this 1 Press TUNER to select the tuner 2 Use BAND to change the band FM
54. sub zones can be controlled by the remote or front panel controls Making MULTI ZONE connections It is possible to make these connections if you have separate speakers for your primary ZONE 2 sub zone You will also need a separate amplifier if you are not using the speaker terminals for your primary sub zone For detail see MULTI ZONE setup using speaker terminals ZONE 2 on page 30 Also if the separate receiver in the sub zone has an HDMI input terminal this unit s HDMI input can be played as HDZONE Here are two primary sub zone setups possible with this system Choose whichever works best for you amp Important e The settings must be changed at ZONE Setup in order to use the multi zone function page 94 e MAIN HDZONE at ZONE Setup must be set to HDZONE in order to use the HDZONE function page 94 MULTI ZONE listening options The following table shows the signals that can be output to ZONE 2 and HDZONE Sub Zone Input functions available DVD SAT CBL INTERNET RADIO PANDORA Australian model only MEDIA SERVER es FAVORITES iPod USB TV CD TUNER BT AUDIO Outputs analog audio HDZONE BD DVD SAT CBL INTERNET RADIO PANDORA Australian model only MEDIA HDMI SERVER FAVORITES iPod USB HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 HDMI 6 lt b gt MIHI Outputs HDMI audio and video signals a Itis not possible to down convert the audio input signal from the HDMI input terminals or digital input termina
55. switching time of AV amplifier operation FOOCIeusc ratio e eec M P d rH eerta bc i t atr Doa ation et dpa tins 18 Resetting de remote control Senilis pa irc ok teda tate b Re aput de Pb td E EE a A EE ra apr bab Ara v UA 18 Controlling Components serseri nar nE aA SET onm 79 11 The Advanced MCACC menu Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC menu cccceccsscsssssssecesecesseersecerssscseeseeesersecrsensesersssrseeseas 82 Automatic 82 B PE 10 quM M 82 Piae 8l M E mU S UN 84 Pare 17929099 Tre 86 Data Manage Ment E LS mn 87 12 The System Setup and Other Setup menus 13 FAQ Making receiver settings from the System Setup ISM 2209 s hie tn pot b ER RP ER DU bead udo p ona ad 89 Mangal speaker SetiD EN E E A A A 89 Network UR naa a E A E E E T NOU 91 CHECK Oe Network Informat ON EESTO AA NE AAT 92 WARE SOU en E I a AA a AAE T E A 92 TEONE ye EN MED LT a a E A A a A a a A meal nened 92 Making n twork settings USING Salal saciccsacetuesvastoncccece i i E LL A 05 O A RR 95 Using Safari toseta friendly d CUNEO Omm 95 Using Satan towpdate thetilmnwar E eaen OT T 96 ToUbESNOOUN Orern ai iaaea a dane avenciad EEE EEE ted EEE ork aa FE Pea TA Ue TEESE Ta 98 ONNE sec AEE E EA es nisi dap either endian bakes beh aha E T 98 NO SOUNGE a e E m mmm 98 ug oa eA qe cM 99 SINCE Sr eA MISTER 100 VOGO gata ie eget ces to 100 Ge MEDAN sayeth E o DOO TT Emm 101 Protessiona
56. the DVD BD Pioneer 2078 2099 2107 2109 2144 2157 2193 2194 2195 2196 2258 2259 2260 2261 2264 2265 2266 2270 VCR Pioneer 1053 1108 Adyson 1050 Aiwa 1033 1034 1035 Akai 1034 Akiba 1040 1050 Akura 1034 1040 1050 Alba 1035 1036 1037 1040 1050 1051 Ambassador 1037 Amstrad 1033 1050 1051 Anitech 1040 1050 ASA 1038 1039 Asuka 1033 1038 1039 1040 1050 Audiosonic 1051 Baird 1033 1034 1036 1051 Bang amp Olufsen 1052 Basic Line 1035 1036 1037 1040 1050 1051 Baur 1039 Bestar 1036 1037 1051 Black Panther Line 1036 1051 Panasonic 2263 2269 Sharp 2267 2215 Sony 2268 2211 2272 2213 22106 Blaupunkt 1039 Bondstec 1037 1050 Bush 1035 1036 1040 1050 1051 Cathay 1051 Catron 1037 CGE 1033 1034 Cimline 1035 1040 1050 Clatronic 1037 1050 Condor 1036 1037 1051 Crown 1036 1037 1040 1050 1051 Daewoo 1036 1037 1051 Dansai 1040 1050 1051 Dantax 1035 Daytron 1036 1051 De Graaf 1039 Decca 1033 1034 1039 Denko 1050 Dual 1034 1051 1060 Dumont 1033 1039 Elbe 1051 Elcatech 1050 Toshiba 2274 Elsay 1050 Elta 1040 1050 1051 Emerson 1050 ESC 1036 1051 Etzuko 1040 1050 Ferguson 1034 Fidelity 1033 1050 Finlandia 1039 Finlux 1033 1034 1039 Firstline 1035 1038 1040 1050 Flint 1035 Formenti Phoenix 1039 Frontech 1037 Fujitsu 1033 Funai 1033 Galaxy 1033 GBC 1037 1040 GEC 1039 Geloso 1040 General 1037 G
57. the sound is to be played WLAN POW ERR is displayed on the receiver s display window System Setup gt Other Setup gt inatthe play zone settings There is a problem with the wireless LAN converter s power supply Turn the receiver s power off then disconnect the USB cable reconnect the USB cable and turn the receiver s power back on e f WLAN POW ERR is still displayed after repeating the above procedure several times there is a problem with the receiver or the USB cable Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized inde pendent service company Play ZONE Setup option the sound may be playing in another zone This unit s volume does not A volume upper limitis provided so To further increase the volume use the remote control increase when the volume thatthe volume will not inadvertently When the iControlAV5 or built in AVNavigator application slider in the Spotify applica go up too much is being used you can use the application to increase the tion is raised volume The LAN cable is not firmly connected Playback continues on The Spotify audio stream continues To operate again relaunch the Spotify application Firmly connect the LAN cable page 33 this unit when the Spotify from this unit even when the Spotify Wireless LAN converter and base unit wireless LAN router etc are too far apart or there is an obstacle application is quit application is quit OO between them The Network
58. with an HDMI cable If the TV is connected with anything other than an HDMI cable watch the front panel display while performing the various operations and making settings 1 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode 2 To display the Home Menu screen press HOME MENU on the remote control HOME MENU AN RECEIVER 2 MCACC Data Check 3 Data Management 4 System Setup 5 Network Information 6 Operation Mode Setup advanced Return 3 A Graphical User Interface GUI screen appears on your TV Use and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items Press RETURN to exit the current menu The top level in the Home Menu is as shown below Refer to the respective explanations to set check and adjust as necessary e Advanced MCACC Use this to make automatic settings and detailed manual settings for the surround sound For details see Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC menu on page 82 e MCACC Data Check This displays the Advanced MCACC measurement results Use it to check the MCACC memory For details see Checking MCACC Data on page 86 Data Management Use this to manage the data in the MCACC memory For details see Data Management on page 87 e System Setup Use this to make various settings related to this system For details see Making receiver set tings from the System Setup menu on page 89 Network Information The setting status of the network re
59. with iOS 4 3 3 or later Mac with OS X Mountain Lion and Mac and PC with iTunes 10 2 2 or later To use AirPlay select your receiver on your iPod touch iPhone iPad or in iTunes 1 The receiver s input will switch automatically to AirPlay when AirPlay is in use 2 The following operations can be performed when in AirPlay mode e Adjustment of the receiver s volume from iPod touch iPhone iPad or iTunes e Pause resume next previous track and shuffle repeat from the remote control of the receiver 3 e Display of the currently playing track information on the receiver s display including artist song and album name 1 For more information see the Apple website http www apple com K2 The receiver s power automatically turns on when Network Standby at Network Setup is set to ON 3 If operation is not possible press NET then operate again A Notes e A network environment is required to use AirPlay e The receiver s name that shows up in the AirPlay Ul on iPod touch iPhone iPad and iTunes can be changed by Friendly Name from Network Setup e AirPlay provided on this receiver has been developed and tested based on the software versions for the iPod iPhone iPad and the software versions for iTunes that are indicated on the Pioneer website AirPlay may not be compatible with iPod iPhone iPad or iTunes software versions other than those indicated on the Pioneer website http pioneer jo homeav support ios eu
60. with your IR receiver for the type of cable necessary for the connection Basic Setup How to use the built in AVNavigator eeeeeeeeeeee een nennen nennen nennen nnn nnn nini nnne nennen nnns 36 Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACOC 37 The Input Setup ay 1 c MR 39 Operation Mode Setup peat tee eiae ciao epiac eade e temo ceste osa cessus Ue esc eua ce se tee eese Este tute uoa esse te eee 40 Changing the OSD display language OSD Languagge eeeueeeeeeeeeeeeee 40 About tlie Home Menu iii na erede in Edo dies uad Cru D tes sucess Doi Dra AEN ERU a dS 41 04 How to use the built in AVNavigator The built in AVNavigator is equipped with Wiring Navi which allows you to perform connection of this receiver and initial settings in interactive mode By simply following the screen prompts to connect and set the unit highly accurate initial settings can be performed easily Additionally in order to use various functions easily contents linked to the receiver can be used Operating Environment e AVNavigator can be used in the following environments Windows PC Microsoft Windows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows 8 Windows 8 1 Mac OS Mac OSX 10 7 10 8 or 10 9 iPad iPhone iPod touch iOS 7 Android device Android 4 0 4 Some AVNavigator functions use an Internet browser The fol
61. 0 Telesat 6255 Telestar 6213 6236 6215 6222 6216 0225 0227 0236 6228 6232 Teletech 6213 Televes 6256 6176 6236 6196 6251 6238 6257 Telewire 6252 Tempo 6193 Tevion 6254 6180 6239 6232 6184 Thomson 6220 6219 6180 6255 6176 6265 6277 6234 6264 6210 6212 Thorn 6176 Tiny 6232 Tioko 6256 Titan 6189 6184 TNT SAT 6258 Tokai 6214 Tonna 6176 6236 6180 6203 Topfield 6198 Toshiba 6176 6217 Trevi 6227 Triasat 6236 Triax 6220 6214 6256 6189 6253 6228 6205 6261 6213 6257 6244 6195 6264 6227 6243 6180 6236 Turnsat 6180 Twinner 6180 6203 Unisat 6214 6256 United 6227 Univers 6189 Universum 6177 6213 6229 6255 6230 0215 6227 Van Hunen 6226 Variosat 6177 VEA 6245 Ventana 6214 Vestel 6213 6227 6211 6218 VH Sat 6229 Viasat 6273 Viola Digital 6232 Vision 6228 6189 Visionic 6250 Satellite Set Top Box SAT PVR Combination sat 6251 Allvision 6199 Atsat 6251 BGytronic 6230 6199 Boca 6187 BskyB 6210 Bush 6254 Canal Satellite 6278 Comag 6199 6187 Daewoo 6182 Digifusion 6269 Digihome 6218 DigiQuest 6251 Digital 6187 DMT 6192 Edision 6247 eMTech 6196 GbSAT 6196 Gecco 6199 Globo 6199 Goodmans 6254 6218 Hirschmann 6230 6199 Humax 6241 6242 Huth 6192 Hyundai 6192 Kathrein 6272 LaSAT 6230 LG 6192 Luxor 6265 Maximum 6238 Mediacom 6198 MediaSat 6277 Medion 6230 6199 Microstar 6192 Morgan s 6199 MySky 6212 6
62. 040 1050 Tevion 1035 Thomson 1034 1048 Thorn 1034 Tokai 1038 1040 1050 Tonsai 1040 Toshiba 1034 1039 1047 Towada 1040 1050 Towika 1040 1050 TVA 1037 Uher 1038 Ultravox 1051 United Quick Star 1036 1051 Universum 1033 1038 1039 Videon 1035 Weltblick 1038 Yamishi 1040 1050 Yokan 1040 1050 Yoko 1037 1038 1040 1050 TEAC 5015 5016 5034 5035 5037 Technics 5041 Victor 5014 Yamaha 5024 5025 5038 5046 5047 Satellite Set Top Box Pioneer 6220 6219 6204 sat 6251 Sky 6238 ABsat 6180 Acoustic Solutions 6217 ADB 6174 Akai 6214 Akura 6228 Alba 6176 6200 6180 6217 Allsat 6214 Alltech 6180 Allvision 6252 6238 6199 Amitronica 6180 Ampere 6256 6261 Amstrad 6202 6243 6256 6261 6236 6180 Anglo 6180 Ankaro 6180 Ansonic 6245 Anttron 6200 Apollo 6176 Apro 6232 Arcon 6192 Arcus 6193 Armstrong 6214 Arnion 6251 ASA 6230 Asat 6214 ASCI 6213 6238 ASLF 6180 AssCom 6220 Astra 6255 6180 Astratec 6268 6269 Astrell 6202 Astro 6177 6236 6255 6200 6246 6215 6222 6243 Atlanta 6245 Atsat 6251 AtSky 6238 Audioline 6232 Audioton 6200 Austar 6174 Avalon 6261 Axil 6244 6186 6245 Axis 6267 Axitronic 6228 B net 6232 BGytronic 6230 6199 Balmet 6186 Beko 6176 Belson 6245 Big Sat 6186 Black Diamond 6217 Blaupunkt 6177 Blue Sky 6180 Boca 6256 6180 6252 6185 6257 6237 6187 6188 Bodner amp Mann 6194 Boshmann
63. 109 About Bluetooth wireless technology cccccccccecssssesssssssscseeeeeeeseeeeeensnsenesssnsneeaeeeeeseeeeeenenenss 109 Software license hOftlCe ieiuna tuoi et a epe Ee eoa oaa dea ee vas EAREN ANENA EAA aA aaa ANAKAN 110 Auto Surround ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal formats 110 Speaker Setting GUNS cioe etica voee nece erp dn ees cases a a aana araia aE 111 About messages displayed when using network functions 112 Important information regarding the HDMI connection eeeeeeee eene eene nnne 112 Cleaning the cm ENEE 112 Declaration of Conformity with regard to the R amp TTE Directive 1999 5 EC 113 OOS SAY Mer 114 FS CUMS S o concrete E este nen espera es E eee ccd cee te eee eect nce 116 wo oT lali he O een ee eee ener ee en ar E eee nee ee ee er errr 117 Preset code d LEER oe ne nem etc er renee ee nes ec re nee er ee meee E 118 107 Additional information Surround sound formats Below is a brief description of the main surround sound formats you ll find on BDs DVDs satellite cable and terrestrial broadcasts and video cassettes Dolby The Dolby technologies are explained below See http www dolby com for more detailed information DOLBY TRUEHD DOLBY PRO LOGIC lz Manufactured und
64. 11 DIMMER Dims or brightens the display page 73 12 SLEEP Use to put the receiver in sleep mode and select the amount of time before sleep page 73 13 Remote control LED Lights when a command is sent from the remote control 14 SUB ZONE CONTROL buttons e Z2 ZONE 2 Holding down this button for 1 5 seconds until the remote control LED flashes one time the mode changes to Zone 2 operation e Z3 ZONE 8 It is not used with this receiver e HDZ HDZONE Holding down this button for 1 5 seconds until the remote control LED flashes one time the mode changes to HDZONE operation 15 VOLUME Use to set the listening volume To adjust the main zone sound volume press MAIN RECEIVER first and then press this button When in the sub zone press the SUB ZONE CONTROL button first and then press this button 16 MUTE Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been muted adjusting the volume also restores the sound To mute the main zone sound volume press MAIN RECEIVER first and then press this button When in the sub zone press the SUB ZONE CONTROL button first and then press this button 17 RCU SETUP Used to set the remote control page 76 Controls and displays Controls and displays 8 Listening mode indicators Display e ALC Lights when the ALC Auto level control mode is selected page 52 AUTO SURROUND Lights when the Auto Surround feature is switched on page 52 1 2 3 456 7
65. 211 NEOTION 6238 Nichimen 6254 Nokia 6206 Opentel 6199 Orbis 6199 Pace 6273 6211 Panasonic 6178 Philips 6263 6277 Pilotime 6278 Pixx 6191 Proscan 6234 Rebox 6196 Sagem 6258 Samsung 6198 6197 6273 Sat Control 6251 Schneider 6198 Schwaiger 6230 6192 6199 6187 Sedea Electronique 6198 Serd 6199 Sharp 6218 SilverCrest 6187 SKY 6210 6212 6211 SKY Italia 6212 Visiosat 6213 6254 6180 6244 6186 6191 Vitecom 6244 Volcasat 6245 VTech 6179 Wetekom 6236 Wewa 6176 Wharfedale 6217 6265 6218 Wisi 6177 6256 6229 6261 6176 6236 6255 6230 6252 6199 Worldsat 6213 6196 6227 6194 Worthlt 6190 Woxter 6245 Xoro 6191 Xsat 6180 6196 6181 Xtreme 6251 Yakumo 6244 ZapMaster 6230 Zehnder 6213 6262 6179 6192 6252 6227 6238 6199 6244 6247 6249 Zeta Technology 6214 Zodiac 6261 6200 Sky XL 6199 Skymaster 6192 Skypex 6230 Skyplus 6230 6238 6199 Stream System C251 Sumin 6199 Sunny 6251 Targa 6191 TechniSat 6216 6223 Technosonic 6254 Telestar 6216 6223 Thomson 6210 6265 TNT SAT 6258 Topfield 6198 Viasat 6273 Visiosat 6254 6191 Wisi 6230 Xoro 6191 Xtreme 6251 Zehnder 6192 6199 6249 Cable Set Top Box Additional information Pioneer 6205 6325 6328 General Instrument 6276 Optus 6276 Supercable 6276 6329 6266 Orange 6260 Telewest 6225 ABC 6266 Humax 6224 6248 Pace 6221 Thomson 6270 6224 ADB 6175 Jerrold 6276 6266 Panasonic 6240 T
66. 55 0229 Vexa 0142 0152 0154 0155 Vortec 0149 0152 0155 Victor 0147 0149 VIDEOLOGIC 0228 Videologique 0141 0143 0228 0229 DVD Voxson 0132 0138 0145 0146 0149 0155 Waltham 0141 0155 0229 Watson 0149 0152 0155 Additional information Watt Radio 0141 0144 0228 Wega 0138 0147 0155 Wegavox 0154 Weltblick 0149 0152 0155 0229 White Westinghouse 0141 0144 0152 0155 0228 Xrypton 0155 Yamishi 0155 0229 Yokan 0155 Yoko 0125 0140 0141 0142 0143 0149 0152 0154 0155 0228 0229 Yorx 0143 Zanussi 0145 0229 If operations are not possible using the preset codes below you may be able to conduct operations with the preset codes for the BD DVR BDR HDR Pioneer 2014 AEG 2188 Aiwa 2149 Akai 2096 Akura 2186 Alba 2122 2133 2143 Amitech 2188 AMW 2189 Awa 2189 Bang amp Olufsen 2191 Bellagio 2189 Best Buy 2185 Brainwave 2188 Brandt 2112 2139 Bush 2122 2143 2177 2184 Cambridge Audio 2180 CAT 2182 2183 Centrum 2182 CGV 2180 2188 Cinetec 2189 Clatronic 2184 Coby 2190 Conia 2177 Continental Edison 2189 Crown 2188 C Tech 2181 CyberHome 2103 2132 Daenyx 2189 Daewoo 2130 2154 2188 2189 Daewoo International 2189 Dalton 2187 Dansai 2179 2188 Daytek 2105 2128 2189 Dayton 2189 DEC 2184 Decca 2188 Denon 2161 2163 Denver 2164 2184 2186 2190 Denzel 2178 Diamond 2180 2181 DK Digital 2129 Dmtech 2095 Dual 2178 DVX 2181
67. 6 6207 Jaeger 6238 K SAT 6180 Kamm 6180 Kaon 6251 KaTelco 6267 Kathrein 6177 6214 6213 6262 6200 6180 6179 6272 6183 Kendo 6252 Kenwood 6220 Key West 6256 Kiton 6213 KR 6200 Kreiling 6213 6194 6228 Kreiselmeyer 6177 Kyostar 6200 L amp S Electronic 6256 6238 Labgear 6195 LaSAT 6177 6256 6229 6255 6230 Leiko 6228 Lemon 6238 Lenco 6255 6180 Lenson 6236 LG 6192 Lifesat 6256 6229 6180 Listo 6228 Lodos 6217 Logik 6217 Logix 6192 Lorenzen 6256 6229 6255 6226 6231 6257 6237 Luxor 6236 6207 6265 M Electronic 6179 Manata 6256 6180 Manhattan 6176 6251 Marantz 6214 Maspro 6177 6180 Matsui 6177 6217 6271 6228 6268 6269 Max 6255 Maximum 6192 6238 Mediabox 6220 6219 Mediacom 6198 MediaSat 6220 6219 6236 6278 6277 Medion 6256 6229 6180 6230 6192 6252 6238 6199 6228 Medison 6180 Mega 6214 MegaSat 6189 Metronic 6256 6200 6180 6179 6202 6250 6238 6244 Metz 6177 Micro 6236 6255 6200 6180 6231 Micro Elektronic 6180 Micro Technology 6180 Micromaxx 6229 Microstar 6229 6192 6226 Microtec 6180 Mitsubishi 6176 Morgan s 6214 6256 6180 6252 6199 Multibroadcast 6174 Multichoice 6174 Myryad 6214 Mysat 6180 MySky 6212 6211 NEOTION 6238 Netsat 6263 Neuhaus 6236 6255 6180 Neuling 6256 6252 6257 6188 Neusat 6180 Neveling 6226 Newton 6261 NextWave 6193 Nichimen 6254 Nikko 6214 6180 Noda Electronic 6202 Nok
68. 6186 6257 6247 6232 6187 6188 Scientific Atlanta 6209 SCS 6229 6230 Sedea Electronique 6256 6213 6198 6250 6228 Seemann 6261 SEG 6213 6192 6227 6217 6228 Septimo 6202 Serd 6199 Servimat 6203 ServiSat 6180 6227 Shark 6247 Sharp 6265 6218 Siemens 6177 6261 6238 Sigmatek 6245 Silva 6229 SilverCrest 6187 Skantin 6180 SKR 6180 SKT 6256 SKY 6263 6210 6212 6211 SKY Italia 6220 6212 Sky XL 6227 6199 Skymaster 6233 6180 6192 6238 6239 6183 6203 6184 Skymax 6214 6244 Skypex 6230 Skyplus 6230 6252 6238 6199 SkySat 6213 6236 6255 6180 Skyvision 6238 SL 6256 6229 6230 6231 6257 6232 SM Electronic 6233 6180 6239 Smart 6256 6261 6180 6243 6252 6246 6244 6257 6247 SmartVision 6186 Sony 6235 6220 6219 6176 SR 6256 Star Sat 6196 Starland 6180 Starlite 6214 Stream 6212 Stream System 6251 Strong 6220 6228 6256 6200 6180 6245 6217 6239 Sumin 6199 Sunny 6251 Sunsat 6180 Sunstar 6174 6256 SuperMax 6193 Supratech 6244 Systec 6238 Tantec 6176 Targa 6191 Tatung 61 6 TBoston 6227 6245 Tecatel 6233 Technical 6228 Technika 6217 6232 6218 TechniSat 6213 6261 6176 6236 6215 6222 6216 6223 Technomate 6250 Technosat 6193 Technosonic 6254 6232 Technotrend 6232 Technowelt 6256 6255 Techwood 6213 6217 6228 6218 Telasat 6255 TELE System 6261 6227 6239 6203 Teleciel 6200 Teleka 6261 6236 6255 620
69. 6244 6247 Boston 6227 Brainwave 6232 6231 British Sky Broadcasting 6210 Broco 6180 BskyB 6210 BT 6195 Bubu Sat 6180 Bush 6254 6217 6264 6228 6190 6232 6268 6201 6265 6182 Cambridge 6236 Canal Digital 6220 Canal Satellite 6220 6219 6278 6277 Canal 6220 6277 CGV 6244 6183 Cherokee 6194 Chess 6213 6180 6238 6228 CityCom 6229 6255 6179 6192 6241 0252 Clark 6200 Classic 6232 Clatronic 6244 Clayton 6228 Clemens Kamphus 6261 Cobra 6261 Colombia 6256 Columbia 6256 Comag 6256 6252 6185 6199 6244 6257 6237 6189 6187 6188 Comsat 6244 Condor 6255 6253 Connexions 6261 Conrad 6256 6236 6207 6255 Coship 6186 6232 Crown 6217 Cryptovision 6176 CS 6247 Cyfrowy Polsat 6220 Cyrus 6214 D box 6275 Daewoo 6267 6180 6195 6268 6182 Dantax 6228 Deltasat 6192 Denver 6245 Digatron 6231 Digenius 6229 6226 Digiality 6255 6238 Digifusion 6268 6269 Digihome 6217 6265 6218 DigiLogic 6217 DigiQuest 6251 6186 6247 DigiSat 6252 Digisky 6186 Digital 6187 Digital Vision 6269 DigitalBox 6222 6247 Dijam 6195 DirecTV 6263 Discovery 6194 Distratel 6202 6250 DMT 6192 DNT 6214 6261 Doro 6232 Dual 6252 Durabrand 6217 6218 Echolink 6185 Echostar 6220 6233 6261 6176 6180 6181 6239 Edision 6247 Einhell 6256 6236 6180 Elap 6180 6244 6183 Elbe 6245 Elless 6230 Elsat 6180 Elta 6214 eMTech 6196 Energy Sistem 6247 Engel 6180 6227
70. 8 910 11 12 13 14 15 e STREAM DIRECT Lights when Direct Pure Direct is selected page 53 7 i T e ADV SURROUND Lights when one of the Advanced Surround modes has been selected page 53 f O0 DIGITAL PLUS 2I j LL LCT RTT MD Y POLSA ES A T f a e STANDARD Lights when one of the Standard Surround modes is switched on page 52 wom LS SR iMONO iA DIGITAL 9 lt PHASE CONTROL ier Lights when the Phase Control is switched on page 54 10 ATT Lights when the input signal level is lowered to reduce distortion page 67 00000 11 Tuner indicators e TUNED Lights when a broadcast is being received e STEREO Lights when a stereo FM broadcast is being received in auto stereo mode 1 Signal indicators e MONO Lights when the mono mode is set using MPX Light to indicate the currently selected input signal AUTO lights when the receiver is set to select the input sig RDS Lights when an RDS broadcast is received nal automatically page 54 12 XK 2 Program format indicators Lights when the sound is muted Light to indicate the channels to which digital signals are being input e L R Left front Right front channel e C Center channel e SL SR Left surround Right surround channel 13 Master volume level Shows the overall volume level indicates the minimum level and 12dB indicates the maximum level e LFE Low frequency effects channel the indicators light when an LFE sig
71. About the DHCP server function To play back audio files stored on components on the network or listen to Internet radio stations you must turn on the DHCP server function of your router In case your router does not have the built in DHCP server function it is necessary to set up the network manually Otherwise you cannot play back audio files stored on components on the network or listen to Internet radio stations See Network Setup menu on page 91 for more on this Authorizing this receiver This receiver must be authorized to enable playback This happens automatically when the receiver makes a connection over the network to the PC If not please authorize this receiver manually on the PC The authorization or permission method for access varies depending on the type of server currently being connected For more information on authorizing this receiver refer to the instruction manual of your server About HTC Connect This receiver features HTC Connect a simple way to enjoy music content from your HTC Connect certified smart phone 1 HTC Connect music streaming provided on this product has been developed based on interoperability testing as defined by the HTC Connect Certification program with the HTC Connect compatible smartphones 2 Music Navigation via the music progress bar is not currently supported with HTC Connect 3 Third party music applications those other than HTC s pre installed Music app have not been tested
72. Accessibility _ Never use font sizes smaller than Press Tad to highlight each item on a webpage Option Tab tegtinghes esch ner Bonjour include Bonjour in the Bookmarks menu M Include Bonjour in the Favorites bar internet psp ins Stop plug ins to save power Style sheet None Selected Default encoding Japanese Shift JS Proxies Change Settings Show Oevelop menu in menu bar e When using an iPad iPhone iPod touch from the App Store download iControlAV5 which is a free applica tion After launching iControlAV5 follow the instructions on the screen After that on the Home screen tap AVNavigator or the icon iPad iPhone iPod touch N 4 LISTENING MODE LJ VIDEO MODE yv TONE BALANCE INPUT SELECT Onan iPad you can operate AVNavigator for iPad Download AVNavigator for iPad from the App Store After launching AVNavigator for iPad follow the instructions on the screen e When using an Android device from Google Play Store download iControlAV5 which is a free application After launching iControlAV5 follow the instructions on the screen After that on the Home screen tap the icon 3 Select and use the desired function AV Navigator includes the following functions e Wiring Navi Guides you through connections and initial settings in dialog fashion High precision initial settings can be made easily e Interactive Operation Guide The receiver will be operated using the remote c
73. B uetooth wireless technology device that sup The picture s movement is unnatu When Resolution under VIDEO PARAMETER is set to 1080 24p or 4K 24p the picture ports A2DP profile and AVRCP profile ral may not be displayed properly for some source materials In this case set the resolution to something other than 1080 24p or 4K 24p page 69 Video parameters cannot be used For audio only input TUNER CD and TV the video parameter function cannot be used Use for video or input with a GUI display Cannot be used when the HDZONE is ON Turn OFF the HDZONE Settings Symptom The Auto MCACC Setup continually shows an error After using the Auto MCACC Setup the speaker size setting is incorrect Can t adjust the Fine Speaker Dis tance setting properly The display shows KEY LOCK ON when you try to make settings Most recent settings have been erased The various system settings are not stored Certain listening modes or HOME MENU items cannot be selected Feels like there is no subwoofer EQ effect Remedy The ambient noise level may be too high Keep the noise level in the room as low as pos sible see also Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 38 If the noise level cannot be kept low enough you will have to set up the surround sound manually page 89 When using only one surround back speaker connect it to the SURROUND BACK L Single terminals To use a 5 1 channel speaker se
74. CONNeCtION iiasasvinedsdanccvatavesuiomsaednananeanieaiarsdaasnembessueitaidnacttaaeiiniwands 112 WI ended C 112 Declaration of Conformity with regard to the R amp TTE Directive 1999 5 EC ssssseee mens 113 GOS cin a E E E E EE E 114 Feat e SIn e EE E EE E A ET 116 S BEGIN UE TIS eue Ud Ma A PI MM A MON IMEEM E DIMUS MIU M 117 Prese COOCIIS MNA EAE NE A ARE AIETE E E EEA E AE ETOO 118 Flow of settings on the receiver Flow for connecting and setting the receiver The unit is a full fledged AV receiver equipped with an abundance of functions and terminals It can be used eas ily after following the procedure below to make the connections and settings Required setting item 1 2 3 4 5 8 10 Setting to be made as necessary 6 7 9 11 12 13 amp Important Using Wiring Navi on AVNavigator of this receiver you can make the initial settings of the receiver on your com puter or mobile device In that case you can use Wiring Navi to make the same connections or settings that are performed in Steps 2 3 4 5 6 8 and 9 For details of how to use AVNavigator refer to How to use the built in AVNavigator on page 36 1 Before you start e Checking what s in the box on page 9 e Loading the batteries on page 9 E 2 Determining the speakers application page 18 e 7 2 channel surround system Front height e 7 2 channel surround system Front wide e 7 2 channel surround s
75. Ck uscsssbsentans e pru bata ad Rd ena ERE td Ru FRE PRRE ARA lage EREEREER EREEREER 105 W per channel For Oceania model Maximum power output 1 kHz 6 Q 10 96 Front Center Surround Surround DSON suus oneri etse eed tket tirita ET EEEE EEEE RR c nn odds 160 W per channel Total harmonic distortion ausos ioosdceceue rtt ortae qr b ope ett rd bir reda 0 06 96 20 Hz to 20 kHz 50 W ch 8 Q Guaranteed speaker TigedallbE costes imurteniditdtasn mn tanindeEbsnt hant endeared epum pap UO Kb n ia n empta ipM antes 60to160 Signal to Noise Ratio IHF short circuited A network MI eT P 100 dB Frequency ReESDORSB ss maeniarehrieaez ntirEFo ER E npa Marl dias kr Sata tiri EE UPUMRI CR rr GT 5 Hz to 100 000 Hz 3 dB Pure Direct Mode Input Sensitivity Impedance E 315 mV 47 KQ Tuner Section laicos kange IV T rH wares 87 5 MHz to 108 MHz PPV cues T n 15 Q unbalanced Freguencykange AM M 531 kHz to 1 602 kHz Antenna 2L M Tr PH Loop antenna balanced Video Section Signal level Wow mec iei NEC T TT ROO 1 Vp p 75 Q SV ONE T TO TT Y 1 0 Vp p 75 Q PB PR 0 7 Vp p 75 Q Corresponding maximum resolution Bude que i ME UU UE 1080p 1125p Bluetooth Section Di GIOI TRO sian
76. DMI use a Separate connection for Cannot be remote controlled Set the remote control unit s remote control mode so that it matches the setting on the audio output main unit see Operating multiple receivers on page 76 To output signals in Deep Color use an HDMI cable High Speed HDMI Cable to Check whether the receiver s remote control mode is properly set see Remote Control connect this receiver to a component or TV with the Deep Color feature Mode Setup on page 93 Influence from a TV whose power is set to standby may cause the picture or sound not Try replacing the batteries in the remote control see Loading the batteries on page 9 to be produced or to be broken In this case press OUT P and switch so that the HDMI Be sure to operate within 7 m and a 30 angle of the remote sensor on the front panel output to which that TV is connected is not selected see Operating range of remote control unit on page 10 No picture Try changing the Resolution setting in Setting the Video options on page 69 Check that there are no obstacles between the receiver and the remote control To use the HDMI OUT 2 terminal in the main zone set the MAIN HDZONE Make sure that there is no fluorescent or other strong light shining on to the remote Output setting to MAIN EROR sensor No sound or sound suddenly Check that the HDMI Audio setting is set to AMP Setting the Audio options on page 67 Other compon
77. EC AUdIO OHUN ic E ne tere teeter A tate S ee eee eee te eer E 67 Seige MiNem sic ereleil ola e a titres Metter eet en teen ttt E 69 Switching the output OUTPUT dtc cea ie aha tdg itas MPa qutd tote GER Ub hb edades 11 Changing the channel level while IStenlTig aisecivsssevessa raersuszencisdun nrbe tea v PHP IA ERRORI E a Rd vE FEE Rd n TRE Pt Cra rabia 11 Using Tae MULCHZONE COMMON TTE TE TETTE 12 Network settings trom a WED DNOWS NOE TO EMI 13 Sing TAE SCONE MMe ne E 0 STERNE om 13 DIMMING niic AISHA NIIT TR 13 Checking your system Settings PITE ORTUS T3 giai A VEST a MN E E EE S E E 14 10 Controlling the rest of your system POUT TINS Gerote Sep TB vaccasccsstasm anislora annie oras ibant si canada tus rancho aal rocked ied s eben Va ta iau aA EEEa 16 Op rating mM tple TecelVBl Sarirane na a Dn o pe ina iian EE BU ST fa top OE Hine dup Y Rr Pvr Mon DI ERI ae SUL dida 16 Setting the remote to control other cOmpORBITIS acoso scissa e pnt ense torii rb o nhe oen Lie pa tod Ur eL T nr LER bn ei a Fel roe aas 16 Selecting preset codes directly NT TETTE T TOT 16 Programming signals from other remote Conlrols icseeeiiscniit nri een trien E ie oo onc Reni TI Erasing one of the remote control button SOTO Sassi ob loti du d dipende tt tcn hate v tou na TI Erasing all learnt settings that are in one Imput TUlClOTi usce aseo rcnt Up OH RR nn llt t Y EEEnt 18 Usno MN OTS Stand M T O 18 Setting the
78. EP Sat 6176 Eurieult 6202 Eurocrypt 61 6 EuroLine 6227 Europa 6236 6255 Europhon 6256 6229 6255 Eurosat 6189 Eurosky 6256 6213 6229 6236 6255 6230 Eurostar 6255 6179 Eutelsat 6180 Eutra 6230 Evesham 6218 Exator 6200 Fagor 6203 Fenner 6180 Ferguson 6176 6264 6268 6269 Fidelity 6236 Finlandia 6176 Finlux 6176 6207 6228 FinnSat 6230 Flair Mate 6180 Fly Com 6186 FMD 6213 6244 6186 Freecom 6236 FTEmaximal 6180 6189 Fuba 6177 6229 6261 6207 6226 6196 Galaxis 6220 6267 Gardiner 6179 Garnet 6192 GbSAT 6196 Gecco 6246 6199 General Satellite 6241 Globo 6230 6227 6238 6199 6257 GOD Digital 6214 Gold Box 6220 6219 Gold Vision 6247 Golden Interstar 6250 Goodmans 6176 6254 6217 6264 6271 6218 6201 6190 Gran Prix 6230 Granada 6176 Grandin 6228 Grocos 6239 6186 Grundig 6220 6177 6217 6264 6232 6218 6201 6190 Haensel amp Gretel 6256 Haier 6245 Hama 6183 Hanseatic 6215 6222 Hauppauge 6231 6232 HB 6196 Heliocom 6255 Helium 6255 Hiro 6189 Hirschmann 6267 6177 6229 6261 6236 6207 6255 6230 6252 6199 6189 Hitachi 6176 6217 6218 HNE 6256 Hornet 6251 Houston 6261 Humax 6241 6268 6242 Huth 6256 6255 6192 6193 Hyundai 6192 ID Digital 6241 ILLUSION sat 6247 Imperial 6222 6216 6223 6238 6232 Ingelen 6213 6261 Inno Hit 6228 International 6256 Interstar 6196 Intervision 6255 Inves 6268 iotronic 6244 ITT Nokia 617
79. Easy Home 2185 Eclipse 2180 Electrohome 2188 Elin 2188 Elta 2142 2188 Enzer 2178 Finlux 2180 2188 Gericom 2145 Global Solutions 2181 Global Sphere 2181 Goodmans 2122 2165 2184 Graetz 2178 Grundig 2148 Grunkel 2188 H amp B 2184 Haaz 2180 2181 HiMAX 2185 Hitachi 2110 2178 2185 Innovation 2097 JVC 2119 2136 2152 Kansai 2190 Kennex 2188 Kenwood 2146 KeyPlug 2188 Kiiro 2188 Kingavon 2184 Kiss 2178 Koda 2184 KXD 2185 Lawson 2181 Lecson 2179 Lenco 2184 2188 LG 2111 2115 2135 2138 2160 2171 Life 2097 Lifetec 2097 Limit 2181 Loewe 2151 LogicLab 2181 Magnavox 2184 Majestic 2190 Marantz 2157 Marquant 2188 Matsui 2139 Mecotek 2188 Medion 2097 MiCO 2180 Micromaxx 2097 Microstar 2097 Minoka 2188 Mizuda 2184 2185 Monyka 2178 Mustek 2101 Mx Onda 2180 Naiko 2188 Neufunk 2178 Nevir 2188 NU TEC 2177 Onkyo 2167 Optim 2179 Optimus 2099 Orava 2184 Orbit 2189 Orion 2156 P amp B 2184 Pacific 2181 Panasonic 2113 2114 2121 2127 2131 2170 Philips 2100 2106 2117 2118 2126 2134 2157 Pointer 2188 Portland 2188 Powerpoint 2189 Prosonic 2190 Provision 2184 Raite 2178 RedStar 2186 2188 2190 Reoc 2181 Roadstar 2116 2184 Ronin 2189 Rowa 2177 Rownsonic 2183 Saba 2112 2139 Sabaki 2181 Saivod 2188 Samsung 2110 2137 2158 2173 2176 Sansui 2180 2181 2188 Sanyo 2140 2166 ScanMagic 2101 Schaub Lorenz 2188 Schneider 2095 Scientific Labs 2181
80. I output This diagram shows connections of a TV with HDMI input and DVD player or other playback component with no nent cable and set V CONV to ON page 69 HDMI output to the receiver e f you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the receiver connect the receiver and TV with audio cables page 24 HDMI DVI compatible monitor When the TV and receiver are connected by HDMI connections if the TV supports the HDMI ARC Audio DVD player etc Return Channel function the sound of the TV can be input to the receiver via the HDMI OUT 1 terminal so there is no need to connect an audio cable In this case set ARC at HDMI Setup to ON see HDMI Setup on und page 63 e f you use an optical digital audio cable or RCA analog audio cable you ll need to tell the receiver which digi tal input you connected the player to see The Input Setup menu on page 39 e When the network function or iPod USB input is selected with HDZONE video connected with the video cable or component cable is not output from the HDMI terminal To output video turn off HDZONE or set HDZONE to some other input page 72 Select one AUDIO OUT DIGITAL OUT R ANALOG L OPTICAL COAXIAL e B o f Select one VIDEO OUT COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO HDMI IN OUT2 OUTI HDMI HDZONE CONTROL TV ASSIGNABLE COAXIAL IN El DVD ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO Connecting
81. IC GAME mode his can be set when MANUAL is selected for V SPs You can t use the Virtual Surround Back mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when any of the stereo Front Stage Surround Advance Sound Retriever Air or Stream Direct modes is selected You can only use the Virtual Surround Back mode if the surround speakers are on and the SB setting is set to NO or if Front Bi Amp ZONE 2 or HDZONE is selected at Speaker System It can also be used when Speaker B is selected at Speaker System and SP A B ON is selected with the OUT P button his mode is effective for contents with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz or less his can be set when MANUAL is selected for V SPs You can t use the Virtual Height mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when any of the stereo Front Stage Surround Advance Sound Retriever Air or Stream Direct modes is selected You can only use the Virtual Height mode if the surround speakers are on and the FH setting is set to NO It can also not be used when playing signals containing actual front height channel information his mode is effective for contents with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz or less his can be set when MANUAL is selected for V SPs You can t use the Virtual Wide mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when any of the stereo Front Stage Surround Advance Sound Retriever Air or Stream Direct modes is selected You can onl
82. ION e Note that when Volume Level is set to 0 dB Fixed the audio output from the AUDIO ZONE 2 OUT terminals is set to the maximum Also depending on the volume setting on the connected amplifier large volumes may be produced even when Volume Level is set to 40 dB Fixed 1 Select ZONE Setup from the Other Setup menu 2 Select ZONE 2 then press ENTER 3 Select the Volume Level setting you want e Variable default The Zone 2 volume is adjusted from the receiver e 40 dB Fixed 0 dB Fixed The Zone 2 volume level output from the receiver is fixed to the value set here 4 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Other Setup menu The System Setup and Other Setup menus On Screen Display Setup When the receiver is operated its status the input name listening mode etc is displayed superimposed over the video output on the display This status display can be turned off by switching this setting to OFF The setting can be made for the main zone and HDZONE respectively e Default ON both the main zone and HDZONE 1 Select On Screen Display Setup from the Other Setup menu 2 Select and set the main zone or HDZONE for which you wish to change the setting 3 Select the On Screen Display setting you want 4 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Other Setup menu A Notes e The on screen display is only displayed for video output from the HDMI terminal e When the video
83. LAC AIFF and Apple Lossless files when music files with the same format sampling frequency quantization bit number and number of channels are played successively they are played with no gap Gapless playback is not possible when the format is being converted transcoded by the server Gapless playback is not possible in the DMR mode When AAC or MP3 format is used sound is reproduced with the minimum gap If you are conscious about gaps use WAV or FLAC files Music files Category Extension Stream Sampling frequency 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz Quantization bitrate 16 bit iit mp3 MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 X Channel 2 ch Bitrate 8 kbps to 320 kbps VBR CBR Supported Supported E E E 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz p pO 88 2 kHz 96 kHz 176 4 kHz 192 kHz NN ded Ee Quantization bitrate 16 bit 24 bit Chancel 2 ch 5 0 ch 5 1 ch lt C gt Sampling frequency 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz Quantization bitrate 16 bit WMA wma Neer Channel 2ch lt d gt Bitrate 5 kbps to 320 kbps VBR CBR Supported Supported Sampling frequency 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz m4a Quantization bitrate 16 bit aac MPEG 4 AAC LC AAC an MPEG 4 HE AAC Channel 2ch 3g2 Bitrate 16 kbps to 320 kbps VBR CBR Supported Supported T econ 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz zu Ete Dn 88 2 kHz 96 kHz Ape toss ad PSP Quantization bitrate 16 bit 24 bit Channel 2 ch Extension Stream Category Adis flac FLAC lt e gt aiff aiff 22 aif calf DSD ff DSDIFF lt f
84. M UE ASSIGNABLE ES ug E noon mS 2 SAT CBL Ol IN El TV ASSIGNABLE COAXIAL IN El DVD ASSIGNABLE e With factory default settings video from the video cable or component cable will not be output from the HDMI terminal To output video you must switch video input to the device connected with the video cable or compo nent cable and set V CONV to ON page 69 e When the network function or iPod USB input is selected with HDZONE video connected with the video cable or component cable is not output from the HDMI terminal To output video turn off HDZONE or set HDZONE to some other input page 72 HDMI DVI compatible monitor HDMI IN f you use a digital audio cable or RCA analog audio cable you ll need to tell the receiver which digital input you connected the set top box to see The Input Setup menu on page 39 Connecting your equipment Connecting other audio components Connecting additional amplifiers This receiver has both digital and analog inputs allowing you to connect audio components for playback This receiver has more than enough power for any home use but it s possible to add additional amplifiers to front When you set up the receiver you ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the component to see and subwoofer channels of your system using the pre outs Make the connections shown below to add amplifiers also Ihe Input Setup menu on page 39 to power y
85. Monitor BD DVD HDD BDR VCR SAT CATV other components on page 76 for more on this Use the input function buttons to select the component DVR POWERON POWERON POWERON POWERON POWERON POWERON SOURCE OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF SOURCE numerics KURO LINK CH ENTER Number buttons numerics CLR e dot ENTER CLASS CH ENTER numerics numerics CLEAR ENTER ENTER TOP MENU TOP MENU ONE a gt EXIT INFO EXIT TOOLS GUIDE EPG 1 e ENTER HOME MENU USER MENU 1 1 1 1 1 1 HOME MENU HOME MENU Se HOME MENU i E RETURN RETURN RETURN EX RETURN AUOSEUP u n qu qn Jy FREE 8 m qu Ju t t e ENTER t 1 ENTER HOME MENU RETURN AN SELECTION SCREENSUE jem e AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO TV DTV AUDIO DISPLAY DISPLAY INFO DISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAY Subtitle CH Popup menu Subtitle CH CH CH CH CH CH CH gt or CH lt a gt Q O 4 a X O 2 o 0 o g UJ O Audio Video components Button s LD CD CD R SACD MD DAT SOURCE POWER ON OFF POWER ON OFF POWER ON OFF Number buttons numerics numerics numerics lt a gt ENTER DISC ENTER Cre ENTER lt a gt LEGATO LINK lt b gt tlie I ENTER I SACD SETUP lt b gt RETURN TAPE POWER ON OFF O D A ENTER CLASS MS MS t e ENTER I B 4 lt b gt
86. ON E 23 Connecting your TV and playback COMpOnNentS in ecavotesacnnsrsssandesnedahet sincanionnsticecsanadetinnlintadasuionedeasencialoub dyeninnadunmmeaise 24 Connecting a satellite cable receiver or other set top DOX sssssse eene nens 21 Connecting other UICC OFT OTIS NET OO TTE 28 Gorin seule hetelelisle grel olan ls nile commemeren tee meter entree OS aren tre a eee ete ee meee teers 28 Connecting AMW EM anemia OO tener et er OU 29 MOLTZONE SEU mienne a EA E TEE fon EReob v tod add erra tdi Tia a EE nema E uU UMORE EDU 30 Connecting tothe network through LAN ITER CS ys ste REGI p t aae UR ose Eh RH RR La Rerihaden Cot ERN ERBN DORIA OF eaae Sa 32 Connecting an us oM E E E E E EE ces aromas E 32 Connecting a USB dEV O ea E E Um 32 Connectingan MHL compatible GEV ec Tm 33 Connecting an HDMI equipped component to the front panel input ssssssse eene Jo Connecting toawireless CAN e E da Connecting ett HP i i MITT OO TE OE m 34 vers wioRiNNdA Eisen mmm 34 04 Basic Setup HOW TO use the DUI AY Nev OM adam aei iaa RADAR RF ads rob a Ra va PRG ac e XU ETUR 36 Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MAC 2 G1 0 ai tat vrbi a eti i t s 37 ThedtTpTL S ST OMEN Uee aE E a TEE Ea AeA aa EA a aa a a NT 39 ie ce E iSc cU RIOT Temm 40 Changing the OSD display language OSD Lana Ge uscnnitrettetideaneddisema natu t e etidm dta mtra euh om ex ntbni 40 DOSES ee MENU comes mv cent
87. P Setup menu The test tones will start 2 Adjust the level of each channel using Use f to switch speakers Adjust the level of each speaker as the test tone is emitted e f you are using a Sound Pressure Level SPL meter take the readings from your main listening position and adjust the level of each speaker to 75 dB SPL C weighting slow reading 3 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu Speaker Distance For good sound depth and separation from your system you need to specify the distance of your speakers from the listening position The receiver can then add the proper delay needed for effective surround sound 1 Select Speaker Distance from the Manual SP Setup menu 2 Adjust the distance of each speaker using You can adjust the distance of each speaker in 0 01 m increments 3 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu 7 Note For best surround sound make sure the surround back speakers are the same distance from the listening position X Curve Most soundtracks mixed for cinema sound too bright when played back in large rooms The X Curve setting acts as a kind of re equalization for home theater listening and restores proper tonal balance of movie soundtracks 1 Select X Curve from the Manual SP Setup menu 2 Choose the X Curve setting you want Use to adjust the setting The X Curve is expressed as a downwards sl
88. Pioneer Operating Instructions AV Receiver VSX Q pA 7 K S CAUTION TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR BACK NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL D3 4 2 1 1_B1_En WARNING This equipment is not waterproof To prevent a fire or shock hazard do not place any container filled with liquid near this equipment such as a vase or flower pot or expose it to dripping splashing rain or moisture D3 4 2 1 3 A1 En WARNING To prevent a fire hazard do not place any naked flame sources such as a lighted candle on the equipment D3 4 2 1 7a A1 En VENTILATION CAUTION When installing this unit make sure to leave space around the unit for ventilation to improve heat radiation at least 40 cm at top 10 cm at rear and 20 cm at each side WARNING Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating To prevent fire hazard the openings should never be blocked or covered with items such as newspapers table cloths curtains or by operating the equipment on thick carpet or a bed D3 4 2 1 7b A1 En Operating Environment Operating environment temperature and humidity 5 C to 35 C 4 41 F to 95 F less than 85 96RH cooling vents not blocked Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area or in locations exposed to high humidity or direct s
89. RN to cancel the test tone Automatic MCACC Expert If your setup requires more detailed settings than those provided in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC on page 37 you can customize your setup options below You can calibrate your system differently for up to six different MCACC presets which are useful if you have different listening positions depending on the type of source for example watching movies from a sofa or playing a video game close to the TM amp Important e Make sure the microphone speakers are not moved during the Auto MCACC Setup e The screen saver will automatically appear after five minutes of inactivity A CAUTION e The test tones used in the Auto MCACC Setup are output at high volume 1 Select Auto MCACC from the Advanced MCACC menu then press ENTER If the Advanced MCACC screen is not displayed refer to Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC menu on page 82 2 Select the parameters you want to set Use f to select the item then use m to set e Auto MCACC The default is ALL recommended but you can limit the system calibration to only one set ting to save time if you want When data measurement is taken after selecting ALL or Keep SP System the reverb characteristics data both before and after calibration that this receiver had been storing will be overwritten When measurement is performed with other than SYMMETRY af
90. S to disable the key lock The power cord was disconnected from the wall while adjusting this setting Settings are only stored if all the zones are turned off Turn off all the zones before unplugging the power cord Do not pull out the power cord while conducting the settings The settings will be stored when both the main zone and sub zone turn off Turn off all zones before pulling out the power cord When Operation Mode is set to Basic the Pioneer recommended settings are made and not all of the functions can be used To use all of the functions without restrictions set Operation Mode to Expert see Operation Mode Setup on page 40 The effect becomes less when the set frequency value of the crossover frequency is low When setting a high frequency value the subwoofer EQ effect becomes stronger How ever setting a higher crossover frequency increases the share that the subwoofer bears for low frequency playback For that reason it is disadvantageous in terms of the phase point of view Set to your preference Professional Calibration EQ graphical output Symptom The reverb characteristics graph after EQ calibration does not appear entirely flat EQ adjustments made using the Manual MCACC setup do not appear to change the reverb characteristics graph after EQ calibration Lower frequency response curves do not seem to have been calibrated for SMALL speakers Display Symptom Remedy The display is dar
91. Upload b Firmware files have the extension fw Select a file with the extension fw The confirmation screen is displayed If you continue the firmware update press OK Once the firmware update process starts you cannot stop it Wait until the file is uploaded about one minute may be required depending on your LAN connection environment FAQ Troubleshooting eee ce ee ee ee 98 POV pe E 98 IS Nae casera cate ie an sea 98 Other audio OO NAS NER EN EE EET 99 BT AUDIO terminal ccccccceeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeessssassaaeeeeeeseseeeseceaeaasasessaaaasaseseseeseeaeaeagagaasesseneeeeeeseaes 100 Lu 100 cl iq gro ccc 101 Professional Calibration EQ graphical output eeeeeeeee esses eer eren nnne nnne nnns 101 DNS Oa 101 Remote CONE Ol arsson RAEE AA aE AA ENANSAR 102 HONI a E E E E E E E E eee 102 j l E EEE 103 BuntnAVNAvVIdatOE aeo ne E E ind 103 USB Intel fas nurtrit REFUS SNRERRRCORNRFRNKERAEKURANEHIN UAM DU UM EKYNIUN END EMPRPNRNAKOD XE UHR SUM ANM PUE 104 luo m 104 SN Ii ienee teenies ga enge dori
92. actor when setting up a home theater system 1 Press CHLV 2 Use f 4 to select the channel you wish to adjust 3 Adjust the volume using The volume can be adjusted in the range of 12 0dB to 12 0dB 0 5 dB steps 4 When you re finished press RETURN Input Volume Absorber This can be used to correct for the difference in volume between input sources 1 Switch to the input whose volume you want to adjust 2 Press CH LV 3 Use f J toselect ALL 4 Adjust the volume using The volume can be adjusted in the range of 12 0dB to 12 0dB 0 5 dB steps 5 When you re finished press RETURN Using other functions Using the MULTI ZONE controls The following steps use the front panel controls to adjust the sub zone volume and select sources See ZONE 2 remote controls and HDZONE remote controls on page 72 amp Important e he settings must be changed at ZONE Setup in order to use the HDZONE function page 94 1 Press MULTI ZONE ON OFF on the front panel Each press selects a MULTI ZONE option e ZONE 2 ON Turns on the MULTI ZONE feature for ZONE 2 e Z2 amp HDZONE ON Turns on the MULTI ZONE feature for ZONE 2 and the HDZONE e HDZONE ON Turns on the MULTI ZONE feature for the HDZONE e MULTI ZONE OFF Switches the MULTI ZONE feature off The MULTI ZONE indicator lights when the MULTI ZONE control has been switched ON 2 Press MULTI ZONE CONTROL on the front panel to select the sub zo
93. ady Spotify is a digital music streaming service that gives you on demand access to millions of songs This receiver is ready for Connect from Spotify which lets you select songs on your Spotify app to listen to on your audio system For service availability in your country check www spotify com Compatible with Windows 8 1 This receiver is compatible with Windows 8 1 letting you easily stream music from compatible PCs on your home network Apple AirPlay With AirPlay you can stream music from iTunes to this receiver and play it through your home theater system You can even use the receiver to view metadata including song titles artist s names as well as the album art on a connected display You can easily enjoy your iTunes music in any room in the house DLNA Certified 1 5 This receiver is a DLNA certified 1 5 device enabled to work not only as a DMP Digital Media Player for playing DMS Digital Media Server audio files but also as a DMR Digital Media Renderer to be controlled remotely by a device such as a smartphone or PC Internet Radio Dy connecting this receiver to the network via the LAN terminal you can listen to Internet radio stations Connectivity Easy Network connection with the Wireless LAN converter With the AS WL300 wireless LAN converter you can enjoy using a wireless LAN connection for the AV receivers The AS WL300 works with the power supply from the AV receiver s dedicated USB te
94. age 64 e Setting the Audio options page 67 e Setting the Video options page 69 L 12 Other optional adjustments and settings e Control with HDMI function page 62 e The Advanced MCACC menu page 81 e The System Setup and Other Setup menus page 88 i 13 Making maximum use of the remote control e Operating multiple receivers page 76 e Setting the remote to control other components page 76 Before you start BS NS eee 7 CHECKING what s in the DOK E 9 Installing the TOCOIVDE eee ee nen enn nee Ser eee ess cete mee eee nn ee ssec ELE eve nen nee ams eine treet arate 9 Loading th DAL CICS ueni cessisi E EE ee suiserewcie ty LINH EE TE FUERTE 9 Operating range of remote control unit LLLeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eene e eene nennen nnn nnn nana nana nana 10 Before you start Features Audio e ESS 24bit DAC equipped All channels are equipped with ESS SABRE Premier Audio DACs The Jitter Eliminators achieve clearer sound Hi bit 24 Audio Processing Creates a wider dynamic range with digital sources like CDs or DVDs 16 and 20 bit PCM as well as compressed audio is requantized to 24 bits and the high frequency component is interpolated upon data processing to enable smoother more subtle musical expression Easy setup using Advanced MCACC The Auto MCACC Setup provides a quick but accurate surround
95. aker B Speaker B A 1 2 ch surround system connects the left and right front speakers L R the center speaker C the left and right front height speakers FHL FHR the left and right surround speakers SL SR the left and right surround back speakers SBL SBR and the subwoofers SW 1 SW 2 It is not possible to produce sound simultaneously from the front height speakers and the surround back speakers This surround system produces a more true to life sound from above With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy 5 2 channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo playback of the same sound on the B speakers The same connections also allow for 7 2 channel surround sound in the main zone when not using the B speakers D 5 2 channel surround system amp Front Bi amping connection High quality surround Speaker System setting Front Bi Amp Bi amping connection of the front speakers for high sound quality with 5 2 channel surround sound Front Bi Amp E 5 2 channel surround system amp ZONE 2 connection Multi Zone Speaker System setting ZONE 2 With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy 5 2 channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo playback on another component in ZONE 2 The selection of input devices is limited Main zone ZONE 2 Sub zone Connecting your equipment F 5 2 channel surround system amp HDZONE connection Multi Zone Speaker System setting
96. aker systems See Speaker Setting on page 86 for more on this e Channel Level Used to check the output level of the different speakers See Channel Level on page 86 for more on this e Speaker Distance Used to check the distance to the different speakers See Speaker Distance on page 81 for more on this Standing Wave Used to check the standing wave control filter settings See Standing Wave on page 87 for more on this e Acoustic Cal EQ Used to check the calibration values of the listening environment s frequency response See Acoustic Cal EQ on page 87 for more on this 4 Press RETURN to go back to the MCACC Data Check menu repeating steps 2 and 3 to check other settings 5 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the HOME MENU Speaker Setting Use this to display the speaker size and number of speakers See Speaker Setting on page 89 for more on this 1 Select Speaker Setting from the MCACC Data Check menu 2 Select the channel you want to check Use to select the channel The corresponding channel on the layout diagram is highlighted Channel Level Use this to display the level of the various channels See Channel Level on page 90 for more on this 1 Select Channel Level from the MCACC Data Check menu 2 When MCACC is highlighted use to select the MCACC preset you want to check The level of the various channels set at the selected MCACC preset is displayed is displayed fo
97. alance from front to back making the sound more distant minus settings or more forward positive settings Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for a wraparound effect Adjusts the center gain to create a wider stereo effect with vocals Adjust the effect from 0 all center channel sent to front right and left speakers to 1 0 center channel sent to the center speaker only Sets the effect level for the ALC mode Adjusts the output from the front height speaker when listening in X Pro Logic Iliz HEIGHT mode If set to HIGH the sound from the top will be more emphasized When AUTO is selected the sound field is created with the surround back front height and front wide channels whose Speaker Setting is set to NO automatically complemented To set the respective channels individually select MANUAL When you re not using surround back speakers selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual surround back channel through your sur round speakers You can choose to listen to sources with no surround back channel information When you re not using front height speakers selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual front height channel through your front speakers Option s OFF 20dB 15dB 10dB 5aB 4dB 3dB 2dB 1dB 0dB gt Default OdB OFF ON AMP THROUGH OFF ON lt 40to7 gt Default 3 4 310 3 gt Default 0 OFF ON 0to1 0
98. ally using the Manual speaker setup on page 89 e The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position This set ting should be accurate taking delay and room characteristics into account and generally does not need to be changed e f Auto MCACC Setup measurement results are incorrect due to the interaction of the speakers and viewing environment we recommend adjusting the settings manually You can also choose to view the settings by selecting individual parameters from the MCACC Data Check screen see Checking MCACC Data on page 86 Press RETURN after you have finished checking each screen When you re finished select RETURN to go back to the HOME MENU Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this receiver upon completion of the Auto MCACC Setup The Advanced MCACC menu Manual MCACC setup You can use the settings in the Manual MCACC setup menu to make detailed adjustments when you re more familiar with the system Before making these settings you should have already completed Automatically con ducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC on page 37 You only need to make these settings once unless you change the placement of your current speaker system or add new speakers A CAUTION e The test tones used in the Manual MCACC setup are output at high volume amp Important e Press the MCACC button while the pertinent setup screens are displayed to selec
99. aps Ha ocHoBHuTe uW3ackBaHMs N npyru CEOTBeTHM nocrauHoB ieHus Ha 1upekruBa 1999 5 EC Polski Niniejszym Pioneer o wiadcza ze jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymo gami oraz pozostalymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999 5 EC Norsk Pioneer erklaerer herved at utstyret er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999 5 EF Islenska H r me l sir Pioneer yfir v a er i samr mi vi grunnkr fur og a rar kr fur sem ger ar eru tilskipun 1999 5 EC Hrvatski Ovime tvrtka Pioneer izjavljuje da je ovaj u skladu osnovnim zahtjevima i ostalim odredbama Direktive 1999 5 EC R TTE 24L_C1_En Additional information Glossary Audio formats Decoding Dolby The Dolby technologies are explained below See http www dolby com for more detailed information Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a multichannel digital audio coding system widely used in cinemas and in the home for DVD and digital broadcast soundtracks Dolby TrueHD Dolby TrueHD is the lossless encoding technology developed for high definition optical discs in the upcoming era Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Plus is the audio technology for all high definition programming and media It combines the effi ciency to meet future broadcast demands with the power and flexibility to realize the full audio potential expected in the upcoming high definition era Dolby Digital Surround EX Do
100. ate this feature If the power switches off even with 2 switched on turn down the volume With 1 or 2 on some features may be unavailable If there is very little low frequency information in the source material change your speaker settings to Front SMALL Subwoofer YES or Front LARGE Subwoofer PLUS see Speaker Setting on page 89 The unit does not respond when the Try switching the receiver off then back on again buttons are pressed Try disconnecting the power cord then connect again AMP ERR blinks in the display then The receiver may have a serious problem Do not try switching the receiver on Unplug the power automatically switches off the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized independent service company The ADVANCED MCACC blinks and the power does not turn on FAQ Symptom Remedy The receiver suddenly switches off or There is a possibility that the power supply circuit of the receiver has failed Wait at least the FL OFF indicator blinks one minute and then turn ON the power again If the same symptom appears again after turning ON the power again stop using the receiver disconnect the power cable and request repair AMP OVERHEAT blinks in the dis play and the FL OFF indicator flash and the power turns off Allow the unit to cool down in a well ventilated place before switching back on see Installing the receiver on page 9 Check whether the cables used to connect the speake
101. bi amping the front speakers or as an independent speaker system in another room 1 Select Speaker System from the Manual SP Setup menu See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu on page 89 if you re not already at this screen 2 Select the speaker system setting e Normal SB FH Select for normal home theater use with front height speakers in your main speaker sys tem A setup e Normal SB FW Select for normal home theater use with front wide speakers in your main speaker system A setup e Speaker B Select to use the B speaker terminals to listen to stereo playback in another room see Switching the speaker terminals on page 71 e Front Bi Amp Select this setting if you re bi amping your front speakers see Bi amping your speakers on page 21 e ZONE 2 Select to use the surround back speaker terminals for an independent system in another zone see Using the MULTI ZONE controls on page 72 e HDZONE Select to use the surround back speaker terminals for an independent system in HDZONE see Using the MULTI ZONE controls on page 72 3 Ifyou selected Normal SB FH Normal SB FW or Speaker B in Step 2 select the placement of the surround speakers In a 7 1 channel surround system with surround speakers placed directly at the sides of the listening position the surround sound of 5 1 channel sources is heard from the side This function mixes the sound of the surround speakers with the surround back speak
102. bluetooth Specification Ver 3 0 COT ETUR TN bluetooth Specification Class 2 Estimated line of sight transmission diStaNCe Losses esta Era tta DR EbbUUd E opa usus i bid eph dem v b co abs About 10 m The line of sight transmission distance is an estimate Actual transmission distances supported may differ depending on surrounding conditions uc oM Re dI PME TOTO T TO T COLTS SSMUS 2 4 GHz Wes Eli We Mesy Sls RR TET EE T TTE FH SS Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum S pported B uetoot POTES sirenita eiei eaaa PEDI VP DOANEAN OE EEEE TEA A2DP AVRCP SUPPONE COUE c a a a E avs aT A T A SBC Subband Codec AAC aptX oUppomed coments Protec HON css cod mmera iaa an N araa Fana A i E aa AAAA AEE ea SCMS T Digital In Out Section FI VETO All m 19 pin Not DVI AOM OI TMU VOE cacao Gr PM IM Ub IUBE vec te UR amr ee UFU Dt ey 5 V 100 mA ADM TNT VAM WY UML SI essen o naan ce cee End lesa a rtv Ou vua allodio utu dade beam ce 5 V 900 mA Bs UNUM S o ITUR USB2 0 High Speed Type A 5V 1 deeem IN NT IRERRDNTN USB and Video Composite WIRELESS LAN ADAPTER terminal csrsusserinisereaeki trMkpnsumtb ESPEURER S FER ANH vais A FECDRCM dara dd eduenpetiort bab Di 5 V 600 mA Integrated Control Section MF Ue terni m T ee NT met g 3 5 Mini jack MONO BONS COIT E LETTER High Active High Level 2 0 V 117 Network Section AN TEMA A e a A n a r a ann RT 10 BASE T 100 BASE TX Miscellaneous Fe I a areas ian e a ea
103. casts is produced with HD quality This is valid when the input is set to TV and ARC in HDMI Setup is set to ON See HDMI Setup on page 63 UP1 to UP4 can be selected only when the front height speaker is connected The presence or absence of effects depends on the listening mode On the front panel display DIGITL is displayed e The initially set AUTO is only available for Dolby TrueHD signals Select MAX or MID for signals other than Dolby TrueHD e The attenuator isn t available when using the Stream Direct ANALOG DIRECT modes The attenuator does not function when the listening mode is set to PURE DIRECT with AirPlay e he HDMI Audio setting cannot be switched while performing synchronized amp mode operations e The synchronized amp mode must be turned on in order to play the receiver s HDMI audio and video input signals from the TV with the receiver s power in the standby mode See About synchronized operations on page 64 This feature is only available when the connected display supports the automatic audio video synchronizing capability lipsync for HDMI If you find the automatically set delay time unsuitable set A DELAY to OFF and adjust the delay time manually For more details about the lipsync feature of your display contact the manufacturer directly Only when listening to 2 channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music Dolby Pro Logic Il Music mode Only when listening to 2 channel sources in Neo X CINEMA MUS
104. cautions for bi amping shown above To bi wire a speaker connect two speaker cords to the speaker terminal on the receiver Selecting the Speaker system The front height terminals can be used for front wide and Speaker B connections in addition to for the front height speakers Also the surround back terminals can be used for bi amping and ZONE 2 connections in addi tion to for the surround back speakers Make this setting according to the application Front height setup Default setting 1 Connect a pair of speakers to the front height speaker terminals See Standard surround connection on page 21 2 If necessary select Normal SB FH from the Speaker System menu See Speaker system setting on page 89 to do this Front wide setup 1 Connect a pair of speakers to the front height speaker terminals see Standard surround connection on page 21 2 Select Normal SB FW from the Speaker System menu See Speaker system setting on page 89 to do this Speaker B setup You can listen to stereo playback in another room 1 Connect a pair of speakers to the front height speaker terminals See Standard surround connection on page 21 2 Select Speaker B from the Speaker System menu See Speaker system setting on page 89 to do this Connecting your equipment Bi Amping setup Bi amping connection of the front speakers for high sound quality with 5 1 channel surround sound 1 Connect bi amp compatible speakers to the
105. ce this list of conditions and the follow ing disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution e Neither the name of the Xiph org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE About Spotify The Spotify software is subject to third party licenses found here www Spotify com connect third party licenses Auto Surround ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal formats The following charts show what you will hear with different input signal formats depending on the Stream Direct mode see Using Stream Direct on page 53 you have selected St
106. ce for audio and photo playback page 32 16 HDMI 5 INPUT terminal Use for connection to a compatible HDMI device Video camera etc page 33 Connecting your equipment Connecting your eduipiTieliL eec as aiian aa tuv uiua RN aa EE ER OIN E i E c tuu ae E 17 Rear pane TP canes 17 Determining the speakers application eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eese eene nennen nennen nnn nnn nnns 18 Placing ile SC AON S intet usisi vus cub sewn E DV YR ER NUUS E UDNCEAUR NUR ERES VEN TEES CeVPU DNUS 20 Connecting the SI CAK CIS succi iere cina usare oa E nee nac ro du tenes oct ceceemwetenencesnctecedeteecduciccucwmsencaetteseesenndenes 20 Installing your speaker SySEGITI u scere brcvi eeaxca a eei Did x ax ud Esa Qe cuz E Vea Ur AVR xa x ad Sw En ox V a aa EV UR 21 Selecting the Speaker system Le eese eese eese eene e ene nennen nnn n nun u nun u nana na asas assa ss ssss sus 22 About the audio connection RT E TETTE 22 About the video converter Geet tn eet te ee eee ene Ce ee MEME 23 About HDMI 23 Connecting your TV and playback components sess 24 Connecting a satellite cable receiver or other set top box 27 Connecting other audio components eee
107. ction e This unit s name is displayed as the playback device on the Spotify application Also this unit s name can be changed at Friendly Name in the network settings e When this unit is selected with the Spotify application the account information is registered on this unit as well When disposing of this unit reset this unit s settings in order to delete the account information registered on this unit For instructions on resetting see this unit s operating instructions Playing back audio files stored on components on the network This unit allows you to play music on media servers connected on an identical Local Area Network LAN as the receiver This unit allows for the playing of files stored on the following devices e PCs running Microsoft Windows Vista or XP with Windows Media Player 11 installed e PCs running Microsoft Windows 7 or Windows 8 with Windows Media Player 12 installed e DLNA compatible digital media servers on PCs or other components Playing back your favorite songs Up to 64 favorite tracks on the media server and or Internet radio stations can be registered in the Favorites folder Note that only the audio files stored on components on the network can be registered Registering and deleting audio files and Internet radio stations in and from the Favorites folder 1 Press NET repeatedly to select the INTERNET RADIO or MEDIA SERVER 2 With the track or Internet radio station you want to register selected pre
108. d e The explanations in these operating instructions are for when English is selected for the GUI screen e The OSD display is only displayed when the receiver s HDMI OUT 1 terminal and the TV s HDMI input are connected with an HDMI cable If the TV is connected with anything other than an HDMI cable watch the front panel display while performing the various operations and making settings 1 Press STANDBY ON to switch on the receiver and your TV Make sure that the TV s video input is set to this receiver for example if you connected this receiver to the VIDEO jacks on your TV make sure that the VIDEO input is now selected 2 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode and then press HOME MENU A Graphical User Interface GUI screen appears on your TV Use and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items Press RETURN to exit the current menu 3 Select System Setup from the Home Menu 4 Select OSD Language from the System Setup menu 5 Select the desired language 6 Select OK to change the language The setting is completed and the System Setup menu reappears automatically Basic Setup About the Home Menu This receiver s Home Menu HOME MENU can be used to make various settings and to check and adjust items that have been set e The OSD display is only displayed when the receiver s HDMI OUT 1 terminal and the TV s HDMI input are connected
109. d go back to the top of f the Reverb View procedure is performed after the Reverb Measurement operation depending on the screen and press to return to Ch then use f to select the channel the standing wave control setting differences may appear on the reverb graph With the Auto MCACC e The OVER indicator shows in the display if the frequency adjustment is too drastic and might distort If this function the reverberations are measured with the standing waves controlled so the reverb character happens bring the level down until OVER disappears from the display istics graph shows the characteristics with the effect of the standing waves eliminated By contrast the 3 When you re finished press RETURN Reverb Measurement function measures the reverberations without controlling the standing waves so the graph indicates the reverb characteristics including the effect of the standing waves If you wish You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu ne to check the reverb characteristics of the room itself with the standing waves as such we recommend using the Reverb Measurement function Notes e Advanced EQ Setup Use this to select the time period that will be used for frequency adjustment and Changing the frequency curve of one channel too drastically will affect the overall balance If the speaker bal calibration based on the reverb measurement of your listening area Note that customizing system calibra ance seems uneven you
110. d Gr S RTRV T Auto Sound Perissi Plays compressed sound with high sound quality 67 DUAL Dual Mane Dual monaural audio setting 67 du Decreases the input signal level to reduce distortion 67 Input attenuate V SPs Automatically complements virtual surround speakers Surround 67 Virtual Speakers back front height and front wide to create a sound field 12 V SB Virtual Surround Backs Creates a virtual surround back channel sound for playback 67 V HEIGHT Virtual Height Creates a virtual height channel sound for playback 67 V WIDE Virtual Wide Creates a virtual wide channel sound for playback 67 Tn Plays with a sound field suited for 3D images 67 Virtual Depth Descriptions Operable settings items Other functions ALL INPUT SELECTOR Switches the input 43 VOLUME MUTE Use to set the listening volume 43 LISTENING MODE Selects your favorite listening modes al PQLS Plays using the PQLS function 64 PHASE Phase Control Plays with phase shifting in the low range corrected 54 SOUND RETRIEVER AIR Switches the input to BT AUDIO and plays compressed sound with 49 high sound quality iPod iPhone DIRECT CONTROL Switches the input to iPod USB and sets the mode allowing operation 44 from the iPod 4 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the HOME MENU Changing the OSD display language OSD Language The language used on the Graphical User Interface screen can be change
111. d a a a Ea ea AC 220 V to 230 V 50 Hz 60 Hz FOWSrFCONSUMOUO MT OI T E E Uum 550 W PIN SS UAT LAN e 0 1 W I stadi ADMI Contro ON snnctsiiacierscrnanapaaanienishasadietan s iiac kiia akina Ta aa EI Sen aian tas rar bmi sais 0 3 W lA standby Network stand Dy ON 2 0 W In standby HDMI control on Network standby ON iacdiccccsascnciessnceasncssdaesvacdectedaranmanesadenisseschassddiaicdssssnoneinnadls 2 5 W In standby HDMI control off Network standby on wireless LAN connected ssssseee 3 5 W In standby HDMI control on Network standby on wireless LAN connected sssssseee e 3 5 W How to activate and deactivate wireless LAN Wireless LAN converter AS WL300 or AXF7031 connect disconnect AUTO TO ao TNNT RM 15 min default 30 min 60 min off DIMENSIONS aes pena tees te ocpprtt fiestas tuse aM atu Drum te DEDE UE 435 mm W x 168 mm H x 363 mm D VEN AE CUOMO A QT T Oo S EE mE 9 8 kg Number of Furnished Parts ci aee or TCT MIS NRI TORTE 1 REMO ECONO oan A E TTE 1 AAA Size JEC R03 dry cell DAttEriES ensnare a ATE a EERE TOEA IRN TA DESENA 2 AMOO AMENNA a e ARE A E E AE E A T EEA 1 iab P ODE amenna aeria an E AE E E EEEE E E RAE 1 E CAN NER 1 Power cord CD ROM Quick start guide Safety Brochure a Notes e These specifications are applicable when the power supply is 230 V Specifications and the design are subject to possible m
112. d products and used batteries please take them to applicable collection points in accordance with your national legislation By disposing of these products and batteries correctly you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries please contact your local municipality your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items These symbols are only valid in the European Union For countries outside the European Union If you wish to discard these items please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal K058a A1 En This unit uses a 2 4 GHz radio wave frequency which is a band used by other wireless systems Microwave ovens and Cordless phones etc In this event noise appears in your television image there is the possibility this unit including products supported by this unit is causing signal interference with the antenna input connector of your television video satellite tuner etc In this event increase the distance between the antenna input connector and this unit including products supported by this unit Pioneer is not responsible for any malfunction of the compatible Pioneer product due to communication error malfunctions associated with y
113. ditional signals for the current component repeat steps 3 and 4 To program signals for another component exit and repeat steps 2 through 4 6 Press RCU SETUP to exit the programming mode Erasing one of the remote control button settings This erases one of the buttons you have programmed and restores the button to the factory default 1 Press and hold RCU SETUP then press 8 for three seconds Release the button after the LED flashes once The LED continues to flash e To erase operations registered at the TV buttons proceed to step 3 e Tocancel the preset setup mode press RCU SETUP 2 Press the input function button corresponding to the command to be erased The LED flashes once 3 Press and hold the button to be erased for three seconds If the LED lights for one second the erasing has been successfully completed 4 Repeat step 3 to erase other buttons 5 Press RCU SETUP to exit the erasing mode Controlling the rest of your system Erasing all learnt settings that are in one input function This operation erases all the operational settings of other devices that have been programmed in one input func tion and restores the factory default This function is handy for erasing all data programmed for devices no longer being used 1 Press and hold RCU SETUP then press 9 for three seconds Release the button after the LED flashes once The LED continues to flash e Tocancel the preset setup mode press RCU SETUP 2 P
114. dows Media Player 12 DRM protected audio files cannot be played back on this receiver About playable DLNA network devices This unit allows you to play music on media servers connected on an identical Local Area Network LAN as the receiver This unit allows for the playing of files stored on the following devices e PCs running Microsoft Windows Vista or XP with Windows Media Player 11 installed e PCs running Microsoft Windows 7 or Windows 8 with Windows Media Player 12 installed e DLNA compatible digital media servers on PCs or other components Files stored in a PC or DMS Digital Media Server as described above can be played via command from an exter nal Digital Media Controller DMC Devices controlled by this DMC to play files are called DMRs Digital Media Renderers This receiver supports this DMR function When in the DMR mode such operations as playing and stopping files can be performed from the external controller Volume adjustment and the muting control are also possible The DMR mode is canceled if the remote control unit is operated while in the DMR mode aside from certain buttons including the VOLUME MUTE and DISP Depending on the external controller being used playback may be interrupted when the volume is adjusted from the controller In this case adjust the volume from the receiver or remote control Using AirPlay on iPod touch iPhone iPad and iTunes AirPlay works with iPhone iPad and iPod touch
115. e of digital information at relatively low speeds such as computer mouses and keyboards mobile phones smart phones text and audio information for PDAs etc Pairing Pairing must be done before you start playback of B uetooth wireless technology content using the B uetooth ADAPTER Make sure to perform pairing the first time you operate the system or any time pairing data is cleared The pairing step is necessary to register the b uetooth wireless technology device to enable b uetooth communi cations For more details see also the operating instructions of your B uetooth wireless technology device e Pairing is required when you first use the b uetooth wireless technology device and B uetooth ADAPTER e To enable bluetooth communication pairing should be done with both your system and B uetooth wireless technology device Receiver function Operation Mode This receiver is equipped with a great number of functions and settings The Operation Mode feature is provided for users who find it difficult to master all these functions and settings MHL MHL Mobile High definition Link is an interface standard for transmitting digital signals with mobile devices MHL can carry high quality multi channel audio data and 3D Full HD video formats This receiver incorporates MHL 2 Additional information vTuner Features index See Listening to Internet radio stations on page 57 Operation Mode DLNA See Operation
116. e GUI screen appears on your TV Use and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items Press RETURN to exit the current menu e Press HOME MENU at any time to exit the HOME MENU 3 Select System Setup from the HOME MENU then press ENTER 4 Select the setting you want to adjust e Manual SP Setup Sets the type of connection used for surround back terminals and the size number dis tance and overall balance of the connected speakers see Manual speaker setup on page 89 Input Setup Specifies what you ve connected to the digital HDMI and component video inputs see Ihe Input Setup menu on page 39 e OSD Language he GUI screen s display language can be changed see Changing the OSD display lan guage OSD Language on page 40 Network Setup Conducts the setup necessary to connect this unit to the network see Network Setup menu on page 91 e HDMI Setup Synchronizes this receiver with your Pioneer component supporting Control with HDMI page 62 MHL Setup Changes the settings related to MHL see MHL Setup on page 92 Other Setup Makes customized settings to reflect how you are using the receiver see he Other Setup menu on page 92 Manual speaker setup This receiver allows you to make detailed settings to optimize the surround sound performance You only need to make these settings once unless you change the placement of your current speaker system or add new speakers
117. e amount of reduction to the targeted frequency Level Front L 3 When you re finished press RETURN Front R You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust ee oa ee calibration range EQ calibration range e Default setting ON 0 0dB all channels bands Time Acoustic Calibration Equalization is a kind of room equalizer for your speakers excluding the subwoofer It 0 80 160 in msec works by measuring the acoustic characteristics of your room and neutralizing the ambient characteristics that can color the original source material providing a flat equalization setting If you re not satisfied with the adjustment provided in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC on page 37 or Using Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional Automatic MCACC Expert on page 82 you can also adjust these settings manually to get a frequency balance 1 Select EQ Professional then press ENTER that suits your tastes 2 Select an option and press ENTER 1 Select EQ Adjust from the Manual MCACC setup menu i P e Reverb Measurement Use this to measure the reverb characteristics before and after calibration 2 Select the channel s you want and adjust to your liking Reverb View You can check the reverb measurements made for specified frequency ranges in each Use f to select the channel channel Use m w to select the frequency and to boost or cut the EQ When you re finishe
118. e A below or when different tion and ultimately the shape of your room it results in an overly resonant boomy sound The Standing Wave channels seem to exhibit different reverb characteristics as shown at Type B Control uses filters to reduce the effect of overly resonant sounds in your listening area During playback of a Type A Reverberance of high vs low frequencies source you can customize the filters used for Standing Wave Control for each of your MCACC presets e Standing Wave control filter settings cannot be changed during playback of sources using the HDMI Level Low frequencies connection 1 Select Standing Wave from the Manual MCACC setup menu High frequencies 2 Adjust the parameters for the Standing Wave Control e Filter Channel Select the channel to which you will apply the filter s MAIN all except center channel and subwoofer Center or SW subwoofer Acoustic Cal EQ Pro calibration range Conventional MCACC EQ calibration range Time TRIM only available when the filter channel above is SW Adjust the subwoofer channel level to compen 0 80 160 in msec sate for the difference in output post filter Freq Q ATT hese are the filter parameters where Freq represents the frequency you will be targeting e Type B Reverb characteristics for different channels and Q is the bandwidth the higher the Q the narrower the bandwidth or range of the attenuation ATT th
119. e Control page 54 For discs created with standards other than Phase Control the LFE channel is delayed upon recording in the first place This function corrects for phase shifting on such discs This function is especially effective when playing music When AUTO is selected not only the low range delay but also the polarity and correlation are detected to achieve the optimum effect Some monitors have a slight delay when showing video so the soundtrack will be slightly out of sync with the picture By adding a bit of delay you can adjust the sound to match the presentation of the video Applies the treble and bass tone controls to a source or bypasses them completely This setting is only displayed when the listening mode is STEREO Auto surround STEREO or SOUND RETRIEVER AIR Adjusts the amount of bass Adjusts the amount of treble Option s M1 MEMORY 1 to M6 MEMORY 6 Default M1 MEM ORY 1 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF lt AUTO 0 to 16 ms gt Default AUTO 0 to 800 ms gt Default 0 BYPASS ON lt 6 to 6 dB gt Default 0 dB lt 6 to 6 dB gt Default 0 dB Setting S RTRV Auto Sound Retriever es DNR Digital Noise Reduction DIALOG E Dialog Enhancement lt C gt Hi bit24 PQLS Precision Quartz Lock Sys tem DUAL Dual Mono SIGSEL Signal Select Fixed PCM DRC Dynamic Range Control lt e gt Loud Mgmt Loudness Management
120. e You won t be able to switch the main zone off completely unless you ve switched off the MULTI ZONE control first e f you don t plan to use the MULTI ZONE feature for a while turn off the power in both the sub and main rooms so that this receiver is in standby 27 Note When the network function or iPod USB input is selected using HDZONE the video converter function is dis abled For that reason video connected with the video cable or component cable is not output from the HDMI terminal Also upscaling of the HDMI input video cannot be performed To enable the video converter function turn off HDZONE or set HDZONE to some other input ZONE 2 remote controls Before operation hold down Z2 on the remote control for 1 5 seconds until the remote control LED flashes one time The following table shows the possible ZONE 2 remote controls Button s What it does oO Switches on off power in the sub zone ALL Use to select the input function in the sub zone Use to select the input function directly this may not work for some functions in the sub Input function buttons zone VOLUME Use to set the listening volume in the sub zone lt a gt MUTE Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been muted adjusting the volume also lt a gt restores the sound a The volume cannot be adjusted on the receiver if Volume Level at ZONE 2 Setup under ZONE Setup is set to 40 dB Fixed or O dB Fixed OG Note e The Z3 butt
121. e bass sound output from the other speakers Also note that placing it near a wall may result in sympathetic vibrations with the building that could excessively amplify the bass sound If the subwoofer must be installed near a wall place it at an angle so that it is not parallel to the wall surface This can help reduce any sympathetic vibrations but depending on the shape of the room this could result in stand ing waves However even if standing waves are generated their influence on the sound quality can be prevented using the Auto MCACC s standing wave control function page 85 Step 5 Default settings with the Auto MCACC Setup auto sound field correction function It is more effective to perform the Full Auto MCACC Setup page 37 procedure once the adjustments described above have been completed 7 Note The distance to the subwoofer may be slightly larger than the distance actually measured with a tape measure etc This is because this distance is corrected for electric delay and is not a problem Positional relationship between speakers and monitor Position of front speakers and monitor The front speakers should be as equidistant as possible to the monitor 45 to 60 x CN Position of center speaker and monitor Since mostly dialogs are output from the center speaker keeping the center speaker as close as possible to the screen makes the overall sound more natural For TVs using Braun tubes however when instal
122. e defaults set upon ship ment from the factory See Resetting the remote control settings on page 78 Preset recall Code learning Erase learning Reset function All reset A Notes e You can cancel or exit any of the steps by pressing RCU SETUP e After one minute of inactivity the remote automatically exits the operation Operating multiple receivers Up to four receivers can be operated discretely using this receiver s remote control when using multiple receiv ers provided they are of the same model as this receiver The receiver to be operated is switched by inputting the preset code to set the remote control setting e Setthe remote modes on the receivers before using this function see Remote Control Mode Setup on page 93 1 Press and hold RCU SETUP then press 4 for three seconds Release the button after the LED flashes once The LED continues to flash e Tocancel the preset setup mode press RCU SETUP 2 Press the number button for the receiver Receiver 1 to Receiver 4 you wish to operate For example to operate Receiver 2 press 2 If the LED lights for one second the setting has been successfully completed When the preset code is input the LED flashes three times to indicate that the setting has failed Setting the remote to control other components Most components can be assigned to one of the input function buttons such as DVD or CD using the compo nent s manufacture
123. e heard from the receiver at this time If this sound bothers you we recommend to change the speaker terminal option see Switching the speaker terminals on page 71 Broadcast stations cannot be selected automatically or there is considerable noise in radio broad casts Fully extend the FM wire antenna adjust the position for best reception and secure to a wall etc Use an outdoor antenna for better reception see page 29 Adjust the position and direction of the AM antenna Noise may be caused by interference from other equipment such as a fluorescent light motor etc Switch off or move the other equipment or move the AM antenna Noise is output when scanning a DIS CD This is not a malfunction of the receiver The scan function of your player alters the digital information making it unreadable resulting in noise being output Lower the volume when scanning When playing a DTS format LD there Make sure that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL see Choosing the input signal on is audible noise on the soundtrack page 54 To route more signal to the subwoofer set it to PLUS or set the front speakers to SMALL see Speaker Setting on page 89 Subwoofer output is very low Everything seems to be set up cor The speakers may be out of phase Check that the positive negative speaker terminals on rectly but the playback sound is odd the receiver are matched with the corresponding terminals on the
124. e of batteries may result in such hazards as leakage and bursting Observe the following precautions e Never use new and old batteries together e nsert the plus and minus sides of the batteries properly according to the marks in the battery case e When inserting the batteries make sure not to damage the springs on the battery s terminals This can cause batteries to leak or overheat e Batteries with the same shape may have different voltages Do not use different batteries together e When disposing of used batteries please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public insti tution s rules that apply in your country area Operating range of remote control unit The remote control may not work properly if e here are obstacles between the remote control and the receiver s remote sensor e Direct sunlight or fluorescent light is shining onto the remote sensor e The receiver is located near a device that is emitting intrared rays e The receiver is operated simultaneously with another infrared remote control unit PEX Before you start Controls and displays Remote control se respesansansencncetes amar snshieaenaneranicesunasisnnnstepanasopriunnindctesanapsuneaeoeinbiseetnvanastiansivenseaawenbansskinmarnnus 12 DAS ONY T 14 Front panels codec ee E MM EE EE R EE 15 Controls and displays Remote control This section explains
125. e still be selected directly with the input function buttons 7 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the System Setup menu Input function default and possible settings The terminals on the receiver generally correspond to the name of one of the input functions If you have con nected components to this receiver differently from or in addition to the defaults below see Ihe Input Setup menu on page 39 to tell the receiver how you ve connected up The dots 6 indicate possible assignments Input Terminals Input function Component BD BD DVD IN 1 COAX 1 IN 1 SAT CBL IN 2 e HDMI 1 e HDMI 2 e HDMI 3 IN 3 HDMI 4 IN 4 aad Ws HDMI 6 MHL IN 6 INTERNET RADIO PANDORA For Australian Model Only MEDIA SERVER FAVORITES iPod USB TV OPT 1 lt a gt CD ANALOG 1 lt b gt TUNER BT AUDIO a When ARC at HDMI Setup is set to ON it is not possible to make assignments to the TV input s Audio In terminals b Only the TV and CD inputs can be assigned to ANALOG 1 Basic Setup Operation Mode Setup This receiver is equipped with a great number of functions and settings The Operation Mode feature is provided for users who find it difficult to master all these functions and settings One of two settings can be selected for the Operation Mode Expert and Basic e The OSD display is only displayed when the receiver s HDMI OUT 1 terminal and the TV s HDMI input are connected with an HDMI cable If
126. e this function to limit the maximum volume The volume cannot be increased above the level set here even by operating VOLUME button or the dial on the front panel e OFF default The maximum volume is not limited e 20 0dB 15 0dB 10 0dB 5 0dB 0 0dB The maximum volume is limited to the value set here 4 Select the Mute Level setting you want This sets how much the volume is to be turned down when MUTE is pressed e FULL default No sound e 40 0dB 20 0dB The volume will be turned down to the level specified here 5 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Other Setup menu Remote Control Mode Setup e Default setting 1 This sets this receiver s remote control mode to prevent erroneous operation when multiple units of the receiver are being used 1 Select Remote Control Mode Setup from the Other Setup menu 2 Select the Remote Control Mode setting you want 3 Select OK to change the remote control mode 4 Follow the instructions on the screen to change the remote control s setting See Operating multiple receivers on page 76 5 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Other Setup menu Software Update Use this procedure to update the receiver s software and check the version There are two ways to update via the Internet and via a USB memory device Updating via the Internet is performed by accessing the file server from the receiver and downloading the file This
127. ecifications are not played back on this receiver page 45 Connect the USB memory device and switch on this receiver page 32 This receiver does not support USB hubs page 45 Switch off and on again this receiver Reconnect the USB device with the receiver switched off Change to an input other than iPod USB then set the input back to iPod USB Check whether the format of your USB memory device is either FAT 16 or FAT 32 Note that the FAT 12 NTFS and HFS formats cannot be played back on this receiver page 45 See the list of file formats that can be played back on this receiver page 46 Press iPod USB to set the remote control to the iPod USB control mode There is a problem with the power supply for the USB memory After turning off the receiver disconnect the USB memory connect the USB memory again and then turn on the power of the receiver If Over Current is displayed even though the above opera tion is repeated several times there is a problem with the receiver or USB memory Disconnect the power cable and request repair FAQ iPod Symptom iPod is not recognized iPod touch iPhone is not recognized or otherwise does not operate properly iPod cannot be operated with the remote control Network Symptom Cannot access the network Playback does not start while Connecting con tinues to be displayed The network function can not be operated with the remote control T
128. ect a music file that has a sampling frequency of 48 kHz or less About playable file formats The USB function of this receiver supports the following file formats Note that some file formats are not available for playback although they are listed as playable file formats e With MP3 WAV AAC FLAC AIFF and Apple Lossless files when music files with the same format sampling frequency quantization bit number and number of channels are played successively they are played with no gap When AAC or MP8 format is used sound is reproduced with the minimum gap If you are conscious about gaps use WAV or FLAC files Music files Category MP3 lt a gt WAV WMA AAC Apple Lossless FLAC lt e gt Extension mp3 Wav wma m4a aac 3gp og m4a mp4 flac MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 LPCM WMA2 7 8 9 lt d gt MPEG 4 AAC LC MPEG 4 HE AAC Apple Lossless FLAC Stream Sampling frequency Quantization bitrate Channel Bitrate VBR CBR Sampling frequency lt b gt Quantization bitrate Channel Sampling frequency Quantization bitrate Channel Bitrate VBR CBR Sampling frequency Quantization bitrate Channel Bitrate VBR CBR Sampling frequency Quantization bitrate Channel Sampling frequency lt b gt Quantization bitrate Channel 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 16 bit zx 8 kbps to 320 kbps Supported Supported 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 88 2 kHz 96 kH
129. ed trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries HTC Connect NTC Connect HTC HTC Connect and the HTC Connect logo are trademarks of HTC Corporation Additional information About iPod About aptX Made for apt ER CSR iPod iPhone AirPlay AirPlay works with iPhone iPad and iPod touch with iOS 4 3 3 or later Mac with OS X Mountain Lion and Mac and PC with iTunes 10 2 2 or later USB works with iPhone 5s iPhone 5c iPhone 5 iPhone 4s iPhone 4 iPhone 3GS iPhone 3G iPhone iPod touch 1st through 5th generation and iPod nano 3rd through 7th generation Made for iPod and Made for iPhone mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect spe cifically to iPod or iPhone respectively and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance Apple AirPlay iPad iPhone iPod iPod nano iPod touch ITunes Safari Bonjour Mac Mac OS and OS X are trade marks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries 3l t th The AirPlay logo is a trademark of Apple Inc 63 ue 00 App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc 2013 CSR plc and its group companies The aptX9 mark and the aptX logo are trade marks of CSR plc or one o
130. ed when a volume operation is per formed from the controller There is a connection routed through a wireless LAN on the same network In case of Windows Media Player 11 You are currently logged onto the domain through your PC with Windows XP or Windows Vista installed In case of Windows Media Player 12 You are currently logged onto the domain through your PC with Windows 7 or Windows 8 installed The firewall settings for components on the network are currently in operation You are currently disconnected from the Internet The broadcasts from an Internet radio station are stopped or inter rupted FAQ Remedy Check whether the audio file was recorded in a format sup ported by this receiver Check whether the folder has been damaged or corrupted Note that there are cases where even the audio files listed as playable on this receiver cannot be played back or displayed page 61 Connect the LAN cable properly page 32 Use 100BASE TX to access the components on the net work In this case adjust the volume from the receiver or remote control There may be a shortage of bandwidth on the 2 4 GHz band used by the wireless LAN Make wired LAN connections not routed through a wireless LAN Install away from any devices emitting electromagnetic waves on the 2 4 GHz band microwave ovens game con soles etc If this does not solve the problem stop using other devices that emit electromagnetic waves
131. ed device must support A2DP profiles e Pioneer does not guarantee proper connection and operation of this unit with all wireless technology enabled devices Remote control operation The remote control supplied with this unit allows you to play and stop media and perform other operations 7 Notes e he Bluetooth wireless technology enabled device must support AVRCP profiles e Remote control operations cannot be guaranteed for all Bluetooth wireless technology enabled devices Pairing with the unit Initial registration In order for the unit to playback music stored on a B uetooth capable device pairing must first be performed Pairing should be performed when first using the unit with the B uetooth capable device or when the pairing data on the device has been erased for any reason Pairing is a step required to allow communication using B uetooth wireless technology to be carried out e Pairing is performed the first time that you use the unit and the B uetooth capable device together e n order to allow communication using B uetooth wireless technology to take place pairing must be performed on both the unit and the B uetooth capable device e After pressing the BT ADPT and switching to BT AUDIO input perform the pairing procedure on the B uetooth capable device If pairing has been performed correctly you will not need to perform the pairing procedures for the unit as shown below Please refer to the user s man
132. ed down No sound is output or a noise is out Check that your BD or DVD player is compatible with Dolby Digital DTS discs put when Dolby Digital DTS software Check the digital output settings or the HDMI audio output settings of your BD or DVD is played back player Make sure that the DTS signal output is set to On If the source component has a digital volume control make sure this is not turned down No sound when using the If the HDMI input function is selected sound is muted until exiting the HOME MENU HOME MENU Check that the subwoofer is connected properly switched on and the volume turned up Check that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL see Choosing the input signal on page Make sure that the digital input is assigned correctly for the input jack the component is FAQ Other audio problems Symptom Remedy Speaker switching sound clicking Since ECO MODE 1 and ECO MODE 2 reduce the power consumption the speakers sound is heard from receiver during are switched in function of the number of input channels Because of this a speaker playback switching sound clicking sound may be produced when the number of input channels is switched If this bothers you switch to a different listening mode Depending on the listening mode the front height or front wide and surround back speakers may switch automatically in function of changes in the input audio A speaker switching sound clicking sound will b
133. ed unless the receiver s HDMI OUT 1 terminal and the TV are connected with an HDMI cable If the TV does not support HDMI perform the operations and make the settings watching the display on the receiver s front panel When the input is a 3D signal OSD cannot be displayed Check the digital connections and make sure that the digital inputs are assigned cor rectly see The Input Setup menu on page 39 These indicators do not light if playback is paused Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL see Choosing the input signal on page 54 Check the playback especially the digital output settings of the source component Check that the player is connected using a digital connection Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL see Choosing the input signal on page 54 Check that the player isn t set up so that Dolby Digital and DTS sources are converted to PCM Ensure that if there are several audio tracks on the disc the Dolby Digital or DTS is selected The disc may not contain multi channel material Check the disc packaging for more on what audio tracks are recorded on the disc It does not light when the PCM signal or analog signal is input FAQ Symptom Remedy ae HDMII When playing a disc with the listen Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL see Choosing the input signal on ing mode set to Auto Surround or page 54 Symptom Remedy ALC IT Pro
134. ed values Also by setting this to ON the Sound Retriever Link and Stream Smoother Link functions can be operated automatically by connecting a player supporting the respective functions See Setting the Audio options on page 67 for details on Sound Retriever Link Setting the Video options on page 69 for details on Stream Smoother Link e OFF The Control with HDMI is disabled The Control Mode ARC and PQLS functions in the subsequent setting items cannot be used 5 Select the Control Mode setting you want Choose whether you want to enable synchronized operations e ON Enabled for the synchronized operations OFF he synchronized operations disabled 6 Select the ARC setting you want When a IV supporting the HDMI ARC Audio Return Channel function is connected to the receiver the sound of the TV can be input via the HDMI OUT 1 terminal After setting the ARC some time may be required for the connected device to be recognized and the sound to be produced e ON Ihe IV s sound is input via the HDMI terminal e OFF The TV s sound is input from the Audio input terminals other than HDMI inputs 7 Select the PQLS setting you want Choose whether to set this unit s PQLS function AUTO or OFF For details about PQLS function see Setting the PQLS function on page 64 e AUTO PQLS is enabled A precision quartz controller in this receiver eliminates distortion caused by timing errors jitter giving you the best possible digi
135. ee Preset code list on page 118 If the LED lights for one second and continues to flash the setting has been successfully completed When the preset code is fully input the LED flashes three times to indicate that the setting has failed If this hap pens enter the 4 digit preset code again 4 Repeatsteps 2 through 3 for the other components you want to control To try out the remote control switch the component on or off into standby by pressing SOURCE If it doesn t seem to work select the next code from the list if there is one 5 Press RCU SETUP to exit the preset setup mode Controlling the rest of your system Programming signals from other remote controls If the preset code for your component is not available or the available preset codes do not operate correctly you can program signals from the remote control of another component This can also be used to program additional operations buttons not covered in the presets after assigning a preset code The remote can store about 120 preset codes from other components this has been tested with codes of Pioneer format only Certain buttons represent operations that cannot be learned from other remote controls The buttons available are shown below SOURCE 1 Press and hold RCU SETUP then press 2 for three seconds Release the button after the LED flashes once The LED continues to flash o learn codes at the TV buttons proceed to step 3 e
136. eeeeeeeseeeseeeeeseeeennesneeeeeeesesesesaeeeseeeenneeeages 92 MAL SETUD H 92 BH eundec 4 xag meee 92 Making network settings using Safari ceci eeeeeee esee esee esee eene nent nte nn nn na nana aua a na naa nn 95 Using Safari to set a friendly name 14 eeeseeeeeeeee eese eee eene nennen nennen nnnm nnn nana nnn nnns 95 Using Safari to update the firmware eeeceeeeeeee eese eeee eene n enne nennen nnnm nnn nnns anni nnmnnn ne 96 The System Setup and Other Setup menus Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu The following section describes how to change the speaker related settings manually and make various other settings input selection OSD language selection etc e The OSD display is only displayed when the receiver s HDMI OUT 1 terminal and the TV s HDMI input are connected with an HDMI cable If the TV is connected with anything other than an HDMI cable watch the front panel display while performing the various operations and making settings 1 Press STANDBY ON to switch on the receiver and your TV Make sure that the TV s video input is set to this receiver 2 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode and then press HOME MENU A Graphical User Interfac
137. eeeseeeee eee eeee eene nennen nennen nnn nnn nn nn nnn nnne 28 Connecting additional amplifiers eeeeee esee eere erae se eeeeee eene nnn a anna nnana nnne 28 Connecting AM FM antennas eese cere ee eere eene nennen nnn n nura nn nu nana nn nan r rana 29 MUETI ZONE Setup me PM 30 Connecting to the network through LAN interface eeeeeeeeeeeee eese eene enne nnn 32 Connecting an VP OC ett 32 Connecting USB deyile sssrinin ai SD EE RI D oA DUM UIOUII KOREA ETA KHU ID EDGE E cod a added 32 Connecting an MHL compatible device eeeeeee eese esee esee ee eene nnne nnn nnns 33 Connecting an HDMI equipped component to the front panel input 33 Connecting to a wireless DEAN einer see re ogee ewe eee cee 33 Connecting an IR receiver 2 34 Plugging in the FeCelVGF issiru sinadi innana Ea aa Kad a Ser NEE AERE o XR GIU EnaA 34 Connecting your equipment A Note Connecting your equipment This receiver provides you with many connection possibilities but it doesn t have to be difficult This chapter The input functions below are assigned by default to the receiver s different input terminals Refer to Ihe Input explains the kinds of components you can connect to make up your home theater sy
138. efault 0 4010 8 Default 0 Setting DETAIL lt d e gt BRIGHT Brightness lt d e gt CONTRAST lt d e gt HUE lt d e gt What it does Option s Adjusts how sharp edges appear 40to 8 gt Default 0 The image is only an example for checking the effect Adjusts the overall brightness lt 6 to 6 gt Default 0 image is only an example for checking the effect djusts the contrast between light and dark 4 610 6 gt Default 0 The image is e an example for checking the effect Adjusts the red green balance 4 610 6 gt Default 0 The image is only an example for checking the effect Using other functions Setting What it does Option s Adjusts saturation from dull to bright CHROMA 4 6to 6 gt Chroma Level Default 0 lt d e gt The image is only an example for checking the effect BLK SETUP Sets the black level according to the video input signal 0 Black Setup Normally select 0 If the black level is too bright due to the combina lt f gt tion with the connected monitor select 7 5 Es Specifies the aspect ratio when input signals are output at the HDMI THROUGH ASP l l eoaet output Make your desired settings while checking each setting on your display if the image doesn t match your monitor type cropping NORMAL or black bands appear a The default value changes depending on the type of input page 74 e f the video pictu
139. eiver operation mode and then press VIDEO P 2 Use f 4 to select the setting you want to adjust Depending on the current status mode of the receiver certain options may not be able to be selected Check the table below for notes on this 3 Use to set as necessary See the table below for the options available for each setting 4 Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu Video parameter menu V ADJ Advanced Video Adjust Setting V CONV Digital Video Converter lt a gt RES Resolution lt b gt PCINEMA PureCinema lt c e gt P MOTION Progressive Motion lt c e gt What it does Converts video signals for output from the HDMI OUT 1 terminal for all video types see page 23 Specifies the output resolution of the video signal when video input signals are output at the HDMI OUT terminals select this according to the resolution of your monitor and the images you wish to watch 576p indicates the 480p 576p resolution setting This setting optimizes the operation of the progressive scanning cir cuit for playing film materials Normally set it to AUTO If the picture seems unnatural switch this to ON or OFF Adjusts the motion and still picture quality when video output is set to progressive YNR lt d e gt CNR lt d e gt Option s ON OFF AUTO PURE BNR 576p lt d e gt 720p 1080i 1080p 1080 24p 4K 4K 24p AUTO MNR lt d e gt ON OFF
140. en when the setting is increased or decreased or when the position of the speaker is changed Note that it may be difficult to compare this tone with the other speak ers in your setup depending on the low frequency response of the reference speaker t S D i 1 Sud When it sounds like the delay settings are matched up press amp to confirm and continue to the next channel e For comparison purposes the reference speaker will change depending on which speaker you select e f you want to go back and adjust a channel simply use f 4 to select it 4 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu The Advanced MCACC menu Standing Wave Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional e Default setting ON ATT 0 0dB all filters This setup minimizes the unwanted effects of room reverberation by allowing you to calibrate your system based Acoustic standing waves occur when under certain conditions sound waves from your speaker system resonate on the direct sound coming from the speakers mutually with sound waves reflected off the walls in your listening area This can have a negative effect on the Performing the Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional procedure is effective when the lower frequencies seem overall sound especially at certain lower frequencies Depending on speaker placement your listening posi overly reverberant in your listening room i e it Sounds boomy as shown at Typ
141. enabled device or this unit including products supported by this unit are causing signal interference with the antenna input connector of your television video satellite tuner etc In this event increase the distance between the antenna input connector and the B uetooth wireless technology enabled device or this unit including products supported by this unit e fthere is something obstructing the path between this unit including devices supported by this unit and the device equipped with B uetooth wireless technology such as a metal door concrete wall or insulation con taining tinfoil you may need to change the location of your system to prevent signal noise and interruptions Scope of operation Use of this unit is limited to home use Transmission distances may be reduced depending on communication environment In the following locations poor condition or inability to receive radio waves may cause the audio to be interrupted or stopped e n reinforced concrete buildings or steel framed or iron framed buildings e Near large metallic furniture e n acrowd of people or near a building or obstacle e nalocation exposed to the magnetic field static electricity or radio wave interference from radio communica tion equipment using the same frequency band 2 4 GHz as this unit such as a 2 4 GHz wireless LAN device IEEE802 11b g or microwave oven e f you live in a heavily populated residential area apartment townhouse e
142. eneral Technic 1035 GoldHand 1040 1050 Goldstar 1033 1048 Goodmans 1033 1036 1037 1038 1040 1050 1051 Graetz 1034 Granada 1039 Grandin 1033 1036 1037 1038 1040 1050 1051 Grundig 1039 1040 Hanseatic 1038 1039 1051 Harwood 1050 HCM 1040 1050 Hinari 1035 1040 1050 1051 Hisawa 1035 Hitachi 1033 1034 1039 1045 Hypson 1035 1040 1050 1051 Impego 1037 Imperial 1033 Inno Hit 1036 1037 1039 1040 1050 1051 Innovation 1035 Interbuy 1038 1050 Interfunk 1039 Intervision 1033 1051 Irradio 1038 1040 1050 ITT 1034 ITV 1036 1038 1051 JVC 1034 1046 Kaisui 1040 1050 Karcher 1039 Kendo 1035 1036 1037 1050 Korpel 1040 1050 Kyoto 1050 Lenco 1036 Leyco 1040 1050 LG 1033 1038 1049 Lifetec 1035 Loewe Opta 1038 1039 Logik 1040 1050 Lumatron 1036 1051 Luxor 1050 M Electronic 1033 Manesth 1040 1050 Marantz 1039 Mark 1051 Matsui 1035 1038 Matsushita 1033 1039 Mediator 1039 Medion 1035 Memorex 1033 1038 Memphis 1040 1050 Micromaxx 1035 Microstar 1035 Migros 1033 CD Pioneer 5000 5011 5062 5063 5064 5067 5068 5070 5071 5072 5073 5074 5075 AKAI 5043 Asuka 5045 Denon 5019 Fisher 5048 Multitech 1033 1037 1039 1040 1050 Murphy 1033 NEC 1034 Neckermann 1034 1039 NEI 1039 Nesco 1040 1050 Nikkai 1037 1050 1051 Nokia 1034 1051 Nordmende 1034 Oceanic 1033 1034 Okano 1035 1050 1051 Orion 1035 Orson 1033 Osaki 1033 1038
143. ening mode e fthe source is Dolby Digital DIS or Dolby Surround encoded the proper decoding format will automatically be selected and shows in the display e When only one surround back speaker is connected set even though a 5 1 channel signal is input IX Pro Logic IIx cannot be selected and rdi Pro Logic Il is used e Pro Logic lliz HEIGHT cannot be selected when no front height speaker is connected Furthermore WIDE SURROUND MOVIE and WIDE SURROUND MUSIC cannot be selected when no front wide speaker is connected With two channel sources you can select from e I Pro Logic IIx MOVIE Up to 7 1 channel sound surround back especially suited to movie sources X Pro Logic IIx MUSIC Up to 7 1 channel sound surround back especially suited to music sources e I Pro Logic IIx GAME Up to 7 1 channel sound surround back especially suited to video games e Y PRO LOGIC 4 1 channel surround sound sound from the surround speakers is mono e X Pro Logic llz HEIGHT Up to 7 1 channel sound front height e WIDE SURROUND MOVIE Up to 7 1 channel sound front wide especially suited to movie sources e WIDE SURROUND MUSIC Up to 7 1 channel sound front wide especially suited to music sources e Neo X CINEMA Up to 7 1 channel sound surround back front height or front wide especially suited to movie sources e Neo X MUSIC Up to 7 1 channel sound surround back front height or front wide especially suited
144. ents can t be operated If the battery ran down the preset codes may have been cleared Re enter the preset Morus with the system remote codes If the component is a DVI device use a separate connection for the audio The preset code may be incorrect Redo the procedure for entering preset codes If analog video is being output over HDMI please use a separate connection for the When commands from the remote control units of other devices are registered using the dee learning function in some cases they may not be learned properly In this case register Check the audio output settings of the source component the commands again using the learning function see page 77 If they still do not work HDMI format digital audio transmissions require a longer time to be recognized Due they may be in a special format that cannot be registered on this receiver s remote con to this interruption in the audio may occur when switching between audio formats or trol Operate the device using another remote control beginning playback Turning on off the device connected to this unit s HDMI OUT terminal during playback or disconnecting connecting the HDMI cable during playback may cause noise or inter rupted audio Noisy or distorted picture Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal during scanning for example or the video quality may just be poor with some video game units for example The picture quality may also depend on the settings etc
145. er has a sleep function make sure it is switched off Make sure that the Subwoofer setting is YES or PLUS see Speaker Setting on page 89 The crossover frequency may be set too low try setting it higher to match the characteris tics of your other speakers see Speaker Setting on page 89 If there is very little low frequency information in the source material change your speaker settings to Front SMALL Subwoofer YES or Front LARGE Subwoofer PLUS see Speaker Setting on page 89 Check that the LFE channel is not set to OFF or to a very quiet setting see Setting the Audio options on page 67 Check the speaker level settings see Channel Level on page 90 No sound from one speaker Check the speaker connection see Connecting the speakers on page 20 Check the speaker level settings see Channel Level on page 90 Check that the speaker hasn t been set to NO see Speaker Setting on page 89 The channel may not be recorded in the source By using one of the advanced effect l listening modes you may be able to create the missing channel see Enjoying various types of playback using the listening modes on page 52 Sound is produced from analog components but not from digital 54 ones DVD LD CD etc connected to see The Input Setup menu on page 39 Check the digital output settings on the source component If the source component has a digital volume control make sure this is not turn
146. er license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby Pro Logic Surround EX and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories DTS The DTS technologies are explained below See http www dts com for more detailed information dts Master Audio For DTS patents see htto patents dts com Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing Limited DIS DTS HD the Symbol amp DIS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks and DIS HD Master Audio is a trademark of DIS Inc DIS Inc All Rights Reserved dts Neo 7 1 For DIS patents see htto patents dts com Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing Limited DTS the Symbol amp DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks and DTS Neo X 7 1 is a trademark of DTS Inc DIS Inc All Rights Reserved SABRE DAC 7 AN 31 DAC SABRE DAC and the logo are trademarks of ESS Technology Inc About HDMI HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface is a digital transfer standard for receiving video and audio data with a single cable It is an adaptation of DVI Digital Visual Interface a display connection technology for use in home audio devices This interface standard is for next generation TVs providing High bandwidth Digital Content a k Protection HDCP Hm HIGH DEFINITION MULTIMEDIA INTERFACE The terms HDMI and HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or register
147. er s remote sensor takes priority over the remote sensor on the front panel e Handle the power cord by the plug part Do not pull out the plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a short circuit or electric shock Do not place the unit a piece of furniture or other object on the power cord or pinch the cord in any other way Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cables The power cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be stepped on A damaged power cord can cause a fire or give you an electric shock Check the power cord once in a while If you find it damaged ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent service company for a 1 Connectthe IR receiver sensor to the IR IN jack on the rear of this receiver replacement e Do not use any power cord other than the one supplied with this unit e Do not use the supplied power cord for any purpose other than that described below hereceiver should be disconnected by removing the mains plug from the wall socket when not in regular use e g when on vacation Closet or shelving unit Non Pioneer component 1 Plug the supplied power cord into the AC IN socket on the back of the receiver 2 Plug the other end into a power outlet IR receiver 2 Connect the IR IN jack of another component to the IR OUT jack on the rear of this receiver to link it to the IR receiver Please see the manual supplied
148. er than traffic announce ments LEISURE eisure interests and hobbies JAZZ Jazz COUNTRY Country music NATION M Popular music in a language other than English OLDIES Popular music from the 50s and 60s FOLK M Folk music DOCUMENT Documentary Searching for RDS programs One of the most useful features of RDS is the ability to search for a particular kind of radio program You can search for any of the program types listed above 1 Press TUNER to select the FM band e RDS is only possible in the FM band 2 Press PTY PTY SEARCH shows in the display 3 Press PRESET to select the program type you want to hear 4 Press ENTER to search for the program type The system starts searching through all frequencies for a match When it finds one the search stops and the station plays for five seconds 5 Ifyou want to keep listening to the station press ENTER within the five seconds If you don t press ENTER searching resumes If NO PTY is displayed it means the tuner couldn t find that program type at the time of the search e RDS searches all frequencies If the program type could not be found among all the frequencies NO PTY is displayed Displaying RDS information Use the DISP button to display the different types of RDS information available e f any noise is picked up while displaying the RT scroll some characters may be displayed incorrectly e f you see NO RT DATA in the RT display it means no RT
149. er the height of the ears Step 3 Adjusting the speaker orientation If the left and right speakers are not pointing in the same direction the tone will not be the same on the right and left and as a result the sound field will not be reproduced properly However if all the speakers are pointed towards the listening position the sound field will seem cramped Testing by the Pioneer Multi channel Research Group has shown that a good sense of sound positioning can be achieved by pointing all the speakers towards an area 30 cm to 80 cm behind the listening position between the surround speakers and the listening position However the sense of sound positioning can differ according to the conditions in the room and the speakers being used In smaller environments in particular when the front speakers are close to the listening position with this method the speakers will be pointed too inward We suggest you use this example of installation as reference when trying out different installation methods Step 4 Positioning and adjusting the subwoofer Placing the subwoofer between the center and front speakers makes even music sources sound more natural if there is only one subwoofer it doesn t matter if it is placed on the left or right side The low bass sound output from the subwoofer is not directional and there is no need to adjust the height Normally the subwoofer is placed on the floor Put itin a position at which it will not cancel out th
150. erent B uetooth capable device terminate the connection with the device that was automatically established and connect to a different device 3 Playback music from the Bluetooth capable device This receiver s remote control buttons can be used for basic playback of files stored on B uetooth wireless tech nology devices e Depending on the Bluetooth wireless technology device you use operation may differ from what is shown in the remote control buttons 4 While listening to a source set the remote control to the receiver operation mode then press ADV repeatedly to select SOUND RETRIEVER AIR Radio wave caution This unit uses a 2 4 GHz radio wave frequency which is a band used by other wireless systems see list below To prevent noise or interrupted communication do not use this unit nearby such devices or make sure these devices are switched off during use e Cordless phones e Cordless facsimiles e Microwave ovens e Wireless LAN devices IEEE802 11b g e Wireless AV equipment e Wireless controllers for game systems Microwave based health aids e Some baby monitors Other less common equipment that may operate on the same frequency e Anti theft systems e Amateur radio stations HAM e Warehouse logistic management systems e Discrimination systems for train or emergency vehicles 27 Notes e n the event noise appears in your television image there is the possibility that a B uetooth wireless technology
151. ereo 2 channel signal formats Auto Surround ALC DIRECT PURE DIRECT Input signal format Surround Back speaker s Connected Dolby Digital Surround X Pro Logic IIx MOVIE X Pro Logic IIx MOVIE DTS Surround Neo X CINEMA Neo X CINEMA Other stereo sources Stereo playback Stereo playback ANALOG DIRECT stereo e OTS Surround As above ANALOG DIRECT stereo DVD A sources As above As above Multichannel signal formats Input signal format Auto Surround ALC PURE DIRECT DIRECT Surround Back speaker s Connected Dolby Digital EX Dolby Digital EX Dolby Digital EX 6 1 channel flagged Dolby TrueHD EX 6 1 channel flagged X Pro ioa MOVIE X Pro gioca MOVIE DTS HD Master Audio ES 6 1 channel flagged DTS ES Matrix DTS ES Matrix DTS ES 6 1 channel sources 6 1 channel flagged DTS ES Matrix Discrete DTS ES Matrix Discrete DTS sources 5 1 channel encoding Straight decoding Straight decoding a Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected Additional information Speaker Setting Guide In order to achieve an even better surround effect it is important to accurately position the speakers and make their volume and tone characteristics uniform so as to finely focus the multi channel sound The three major elements in positioning the speakers are distance angle and orientation the direction in which the speakers are pointing Distance he distance of all the speakers shou
152. ers EH E a DUST en bM p E REG UR nb eA RODA OUR 41 05 Basic playback RIENG a SOUC M eer 43 Pangan IRO na A EEEE E A AE A A 44 Paying a USB t PN IHR 45 Pe SIDE EEE E ET RR E A AE E ERR 46 HM SUTIN s TO oom 41 Music playback using S uetooth wireless TECIINOIO Visser el aant Bartenders o var Une eluded incor 48 06 Listening to your system Enjoying various types of playback using the listening modes sssssseemme emnes 52 Selecting MCACC i i RTT 54 gos poBU NINE E tree entree teen S S QUU SLT 54 Better SOU MC LISI PHASE CODE Olsson mte dene edd M REbE ater ee aa Deo MA Mb CM dnt MM 54 07 Playback with NETWORK features IVECO TG TT 56 Playback with Network TUNGOR S niesie o a ee oe ene Te a Ten 57 POUT SVC re DIAY VIM erT E A E E E EAE ier TETE AEE U TEE N 60 P les mos cis MIN RICO E E AEA E ae E O E A E EA OEE E 61 08 Control with HDMI function About the Control Ra NISI o NE m 63 Making Control with ADMI COMI eI EET o o E OO SETTE 63 PIDE ESSET cola rias Net unatuad cete ade A E EDDIE Eerp En 63 Eo RU IE eec D A TT TESTER 64 ADo tsynchronized operations ercer arnir an EA PUT neni ron ER M Un mi e IA RA PUL Hau EC aU ENTEN 64 wicanankn 328 estuiiricue HM NEC p 64 About Sound Retriever Link and Stream Smoother DITE itc s sei eoa hn uM eo Ra ien Fito deo aac un dad 64 Ca unions on the Control usx Er Ue 65 09 Using other functions SCURG I
153. ers so that the surround sound is heard from diagonally to the rear as it should be Depending on the positions of the speakers and the sound source in some cases it may not be possible to achieve good results In this case set the setting to ON SIDE or IN REAR e ON SIDE Select when the surround speakers is positioned right beside you e IN REAR Select when the surround speaker is positioned obliquely behind you 4 When Setting Change is displayed select Yes If No is selected the setting is not changed You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu Speaker Setting Use this setting to specify your speaker configuration size number of speakers and crossover frequency It is a good idea to make sure that the settings made in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC on page 3 are correct Note that this setting applies to all MCACC presets and cannot be set independently 1 Select Speaker Setting from the Manual SP Setup menu 2 Choose the set of speakers that you want to set then select a speaker size Use to select the size and number of each of the following speakers e Front Select LARGE if your front speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively or if you didn t connect a subwoofer Select SMALL to send the bass frequencies to the subwoofer e Center Select LARGE if your center speaker reproduces bass frequencies effectively or select SMALL to send bass frequencie
154. et to OFF set it to or the sound Is interrupted Check that the B uetooth wireless technology device is not too far from the unit and that ON obstructions are not set between the B uetooth wireless technology device and the unit Set the B uetooth wireless technology device and the unit so that the distance between them is less than about 10 m 33 ft and no obstructions exist between them When the network function or iPod USB input is selected in HDZONE video connected with the video cable or component cable is not output from the HDMI terminal To output video turn off HDZONE or set HDZONE to some other input page 72 The Bluetooth wireless technology device may not be set to the communication mode amp upponingthes Datodihwireless technology Checkthe setting el ie Bue ood wireless NCIS intermittent or distorted Sometimes a MIGEO deck may output a noisy video signal during scanning for example fee nine loaveevice picture Of the video quality may just be poor with Some video game units for example The modd a picture quality may also depend on the settings etc of your display device Switch off Check that pairing is correct The pairing setting was deleted from this unit or the B ue the video converter and reconnect the source and display device using the same type of tooth wireless technology device Reset the pairing connection component or composite then start playback again Check that the profile is correct Use a
155. eu for Europe 2 Use f to browse the selected category e g albums http pioneer jp homeav support ios ao for Australia and New Zealand e Use gt to move to previous next levels Installing software versions other than indicated on the website of Pioneer to your iPod iPhone may result in Peon ul aN See 3 Continue browsing until you arrive at what you want to play then press to start iPod and iPhone are licensed for reproduction of non copyrighted materials or materials the user is legally playback permitted to reproduce e On the playback screen pressing RETURN displays a list screen To return to the playback screen press e Features such as the equalizer cannot be controlled using this receiver and we recommend switching the DISP equalizer off before connecting e Pioneer cannot under any circumstances accept responsibility for any direct or indirect loss arising from any Note inconvenience or loss of recorded material resulting from the iPod failure You can play all of the songs in a particular category by selecting the All item at the top of each category list For e When listening to a track on the iPod in the main zone it is possible to control the sub zone but not to listen to example you can play all the songs by a particular artist a different track in the sub zone from the one playing in the main zone 1 Press STANDBY ON to switch on the receiver and your TV Basic playback controls See Connecting an iPod on
156. f its group companies and may be registered in one or more jurisdictions About Bluetooth wireless technology he Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG Inc and any use of Windows 8 such marks by PIONEER CORPORATION is under license Other trademarks and trade names are those of their This product is Windows 8 1 Compatible and Windows 8 Compatible respective Owners Windows 8 Compatible Windows and the Windows logo are trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies MHL X MEAL MHL the MHL Logo and Mobile High Definition Link are trademarks or registered trademarks of MHL LLC in the United States and other countries Additional information Software license notice About Apple Lossless Audio Codec Copyright 2011 Apple Inc All rights reserved Licensed under the Apache License Version 2 0 You may obtain a copy of the License at http www apache org licenses LICENSE 2 0 About FLAC FLAC Decoder Copyright 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 Josh Coalson Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met e Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer e Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright noti
157. from one MCACC preset to another see Copying MCACC preset data on page 87 e MCACC Memory Clear Clear any MCACC presets that you don t want see Clearing MCACC presets on page 87 Renaming MCACC presets If you have several different MCACC presets that you re using you may want to rename them for easier identification 1 Select Memory Rename from the Data Management setup menu 2 Select the MCACC preset you want to rename then select an appropriate preset name Use fT 4 to select the preset then to select a preset name 3 Repeat for as many MCACC presets as necessary then press RETURN when you re finished You will return to the Data Management setup menu Copying MCACC preset data If you want to manually adjust the Acoustic Calibration EQ see Manual MCACC setup on page 84 we recom mend copying your current settings to an unused MCACC preset Instead of just a flat EQ curve this will give you a reference point from which to start e The settings made in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC on page 37 or Automatic MCACC Expert on page 82 1 Select MCACC Memory Copy from the Data Management setup menu 2 Select the setting you want to copy All Data Copies all the settings of the selected MCACC preset memory Level amp Distance Copies only the channel level and speaker distance settings of the selected MCACC pre set memory 3 Select the MCACC preset you ll be c
158. front and surround back speaker terminals See Bi amping your speakers on page 21 2 Select Front Bi Amp from the Speaker System menu See Speaker system setting on page 89 to do this ZONE 2 setup With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy 5 1 channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo playback on another component in ZONE 2 1 Connecta pair of speakers to the surround back speaker terminals see Standard surround connection on page 21 2 Select ZONE 2 from the Speaker System menu See Speaker system setting on page 89 to do this HDZONE setup With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy 5 1 channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo playback on another component in HDZONE 1 Connecta pair of speakers to the surround back speaker terminals See Standard surround connection on page 21 2 Select HDZONE from the Speaker System menu See Speaker system setting on page 89 to do this About the audio connection Types of cables and terminals LECT LCS 6 1 8 D e CETTE fare cs HD audio Digital Coaxial Conventional digital audio i Digital Optical D amp u2 RCA Analog Conventional analog audio White Red Sound signal priority e With an HDMI cable video and audio signals can be transferred in high quality over a single cable e For HD audio see About HDMI on page 23 Connecting your equipment About the video converter
159. functions The remote control is not currently Press NET to set the remote control to the Network func e Improve the wireless LAN environment by moving the wireless LAN converter and base unit closer cannot be operated with set to the Network function mode tion mode page 57 together etc the buttons on the remote control There is a microwave oven or other device generating electromagnetic waves near the wireless LAN When the DMR mode or Play ZONE Setup is set to ZONE2 Change Play ZONE Setup to MAIN page 94 environment AirPlay is used from a Please refer to the manuals of the wireless LAN converter computer smartphone etc the sound is played in ZONE 2 Network connections cannot be made via the wireless LAN converter AS WL300 For details see Wireless LAN on page 106 Additional information Surround sound FOrMAS ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeneeessssseaneeeeseseeeeeeesesnasnssssaeaeaeaeseseeeeesesaseseeessssseananaes 108 SABRE DAC M 108 Abou dia 21i p C 108 PU CONNECT c 108 ADOUTIPOU aee ne E EEUU EE EEA EE EEEE 109 MV NINOS ssc cts 109 Aal p 109 ADOUTAPU o a PP
160. g Press repeatedly to select one of the six MCACC presets See Data Management on page 8 to check and man age your current settings hese settings have no effect when headphones are connected e You can also press mw to select the MCACC preset Choosing the input signal On this receiver it is possible to switch the input signals for the different inputs as described below e his receiver can only play back Dolby Digital PCM 32 kHz to 192 kHz and DTS including DTS 96 24 digital signal formats The compatible signals via the HDMI terminals are Dolby Digital DIS PCM 32 kHz to 192 kHz Dolby TrueHD Dolby Digital Plus DIS EXPRESS DIS HD Master Audio and SACD e You may get digital noise when an LD CD DVD or BD player compatible with DTS is playing an analog signal To prevent noise make the proper digital connections page 22 and set the signal input to DIGITAL e Some DVD players don t output DTS signals For more details refer to the instruction manual supplied with your DVD player 1 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode and then press AUDIO P 2 Use1 4 to select SIGSEL 3 Use to select the input signal corresponding to the source component Each press cycles through the options as follows e AUTO he receiver selects the first available signal in the following order HDMI DIGITAL ANALOG e ANALOG Selects an analog signal e DIGITAL Select an opt
161. gate songs on your iPod you can take advantage of the GUI screen of your TV connected to this receiver You can also control all operations for music in the front panel display of this receiver Note that characters that cannot be displayed on this receiver are displayed as hisfeature is not available for photos on your iPod This receiver has the iPod iPhone terminal that will allow you to control playback of audio content from your iPod using the controls of this receiver Here we describe the procedure for playback on an iPod For playback on a USB device see Playing a USB device on page 45 amp Finding what you want to play Important When your iPod is connected to this receiver you can browse songs stored on your iPod by playlist artist name album name song name genre or composer similar to using your iPod directly e USB works with iPhone 5s iPhone 5c iPhone 5 iPhone 4s iPhone 4 iPhone 3GS iPhone 3G iPhone iPod touch 1st through 5th generation and iPod nano 8rd through 7th generation However some of the functions may be restricted for some models 1 Use f l to select a category then press ENTER to browse that category e his receiver has been developed and tested for the software version of iPod iPhone indicated on the website e When H or BPI is pressed at the list screen the page switches of Pioneer e To return to the previous level any time press RETURN http pioneer jp homeav support ios
162. gt PANORAMA lt j gt C GAIN Center Gain Applicable only when using a center speaker lt j gt EFFECT H GAIN Height Gain V SPs Virtual Speakers V SB Virtual Surround Back lt k gt V HEIGHT Virtual Height lt gt What it does Some audio sources include ultra low bass tones Set the LFE attenu ator as necessary to prevent the ultra low bass tones from distorting the sound from the speakers When set to the recommended value of 0 dB the LFE is not restricted When set to a value other than 0 dB the LFE is restricted to the set value When OFF is selected the sound is not output from the LFE channel If the sound is distorted this can be used to lower the input signal level and reduce the distortion Specifies the routing of the HDMI audio signal out of this receiver amp or through to a TV When THROUGH is selected no sound is output from this receiver This feature automatically corrects the audio to video delay between components connected with an HDMI cable The audio delay time is set depending on the operational status of the display connected with an HDMI cable The video delay time is automatically adjusted according to the audio delay time Provides a better blend of the front speakers by spreading the center channel between the front right and left speakers making it sound wider higher settings or narrower lower settings Adjusts the depth of the surround sound b
163. gt dsf DSF 176 4 kHz and 192 kHz support 2 channel audio sources only Playback with NETWORK features Sampling frequency lt b gt Quantization bitrate Channel Sampling frequency Quantization bitrate Channel Sampling frequency Quantization bitrate 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 88 2 kHz 96 kHz 176 4 kHz 192 kHz 16 bit 24 bit 2 ch Oo Ch 5 ch lt C gt 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 88 2 kHz 96 kHz 176 4 kHz 192 kHz 16 bit 24 bit 2 ch 2 8224 MHz 1 bit 2 ch Channel MPEG Layer 3 audio decoding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia e When playing the 5 0 channel or 5 1 channel file in the sub zone only the front left and right sound is played Multichannel playback is only available with the main zone Gapless playback is not possible with a 5 0 channel or 5 1 channel audio source Files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be playable but some parts of the specification are not supported specifi cally Pro Lossless Voice Uncompressed FLAC files are not supported Pioneer does not guarantee playback DSD files cannot be played in the sub zone Control with HDMI function About the Control with HDMI function esesesesesseseeeeeee nennen enhn nnn nnn nnn nn nn nnn nn nn nn nnn 63 Making Control with HDMI connections leeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee enne nnne nennt nnne n nnn nnn nnn nn nnn 63 abu kis oe
164. he PC or Internet radio is not properly operated Cause This receiver recognizes the iPod as a fraud The iPod s operation may be unstable Cause The LAN cable is not firmly con nected The router is not switched on Internet security software is cur rently installed in the connected component The audio component on the net work which has been switched off is switched on The component is currently discon nected from this receiver or the power supply The corresponding IP address is not properly set The IP address is being automati cally configured Change to an input other than iPod USB then set the input Remedy Switch off and on again this receiver Reconnect the iPod with the receiver switched off back to iPod USB Try performing the operation below 1 Press the sleep sleep cancel button on the iPod touch iPhone simultaneously with the home button for at least 10 seconds to restart the device 2 Turn this receiver s power on 3 Connect the iPod touch iPhone to this receiver Press iPod USB to set the remote control to the iPod USB control mode Remedy Firmly connect the LAN cable page 32 Switch on the router There are cases where a component with Internet security software installed cannot be accessed Switch on the audio component on the network before switching on this receiver Check whether the component is properly connected to this receiver or the power
165. he selected channel stored at the selected MCACC preset and its graph are displayed 3 Press to highlight MCACC then use f 4 to select the MCACC preset you want to check Data Management This system allows you to store up to six MCACC presets allowing you to calibrate your system for different listen ing positions or frequency adjustments for the same listening position This is useful for alternate settings to match the kind of source you re listening to and where you re sitting for example watching movies from a sofa or playing a video game close to the TV From this menu you can copy from one preset to another name presets for easier identification and clear any ones you don t need e This can be done in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC on page 37 or Automatic MCACC Expert on page 82 either of which you should have already completed 1 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode and then press HOME MENU A Graphical User Interface GUI screen appears on your TV Use and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items Press RETURN to exit the current menu 2 Select Data Management from the HOME MENU The Advanced MCACC menu 3 Select the setting you want to adjust Memory Rename Name your MCACC presets for easy identification see Renaming MCACC presets on page 87 e MCACC Memory Copy Copy settings
166. he subwoofer or mounting them very high on a I 2 l wall is not recommended e For the best stereo effect place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m apart at equal distance from the TV L e f you re going to place speakers around your CRT TV use shielded speakers or place the speakers at a suffi cient distance from your CRT TV e f you re using a center speaker place the front speakers at a wider angle If not place them at a narrower angle Notes e Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is localized at the TV screen Also make sure the center speaker does not cross the line formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position The angle depends on the size of the room Use less of an angle for bigger rooms e Surround and surround back speakers should be positioned 60 cm to 90 cm higher than your ears and tilted slightly downward Make sure the speakers don t face each other For DVD Audio the speakers should be more directly behind the listener than for home theater playback Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the front and center speak ers Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect e Please refer to the manual that came with your speakers for details on how to connect the other end of the speaker cables to your speakers e Use an RCA cable to connect the sub
167. ia 6220 6176 6207 6206 Nordmende 6176 Octagon 6200 OctalTV 6231 Onn 6217 6218 Opentel 6252 6199 Optex 6213 6180 6250 6244 6203 6228 Orbis 6252 6238 6199 Orbitech 6213 6236 6215 6222 6216 0223 P Sat 6252 Pace 6220 6214 6176 6181 6273 6212 6211 Pacific 6217 Packard Bell 6267 Additional information Palcom 6229 6226 6239 Palladium 6261 6236 Palsat 6236 Panasonic 6176 6178 Panda 6177 6176 6255 Pansat 6191 Pass 6183 Patriot 6256 peeKTon 6186 6245 Philips 6220 6177 6214 6275 6219 6277 6268 6232 6179 6200 6176 6263 Phoenix 6245 Phonotrend 6233 Pilotime 6278 Pino 6238 Pixx 6191 Planet 6261 PMB 6180 6203 Polytron 6261 Portland 6195 Preisner 6256 6261 6243 6185 Premier 6219 Primacom 6267 Pro Basic 6220 6184 Proline 6217 Promax 6176 Proscan 6234 Quelle 6229 6255 Radiola 6214 Radix 6261 6243 Rainbow 6200 RCA 6234 Rebox 6196 Regal 6227 RFT 6214 Roadstar 6220 6180 Rollmaster 6244 Rover 6180 Rownsonic 6183 SAB 6227 6251 Saba 6255 6230 6202 6184 Sabre 6176 Sagem 6275 6258 6277 Saivod 6245 Salora 6252 Samsung 6220 6198 6197 6273 6253 Sanyo 6228 SAT 6236 Sat Control 6251 Sat Partner 6236 6200 Sat Team 6180 SAT 6239 Satcom 6255 Satec 6180 Satelco 6252 Satplus 6222 SatyCon 6247 Schaecke 6200 Schaub Lorenz 6196 6245 Schneider 6198 6227 Schwaiger 6267 6256 6262 0255 6230 6202 6192 6238 6199
168. ibution for Microsoft Windows Windows Media is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U S and or other countries Use an application licensed by Microsoft Corporation to author distribute or play Windows Media formatted content Using an application unauthorized by Microsoft Corporation is subject to malfunction Windows Media Player 11 Windows Media Player 12 Windows Media Player is software to deliver music photos and movies from a Microsoft Windows computer to home stereo systems and TVs With this software you can play back files stored on the PC through various devices wherever you like in your home This software can be downloaded from Microsoft s website Additional information e Windows Media Player 11 for Windows XP or Windows Vista e Windows Media Player 12 for Windows 7 or Windows 8 For more information check the official Microsoft website Router A device for relaying data flowing on a network to another network In homes routers often also function as DHCP servers Products with built in wireless LAN access points are called wireless LAN routers DHCP Abbreviation of Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol A protocol for automatically assigning such setting infor mation as IP addresses within network connections This offers convenience in that when enabled it allows network functions to be used simply by connecting the devices to the network Wireless LAN Wi Fi Wi Fi Wire
169. ical or coaxial digital input signal DIGITL is displayed on the front panel display e HDMI Selects an HDMI signal When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH the sound will be heard through your TV not from this receiver When set to DIGITAL HDMI or AUTO only selected DIGITAL or HDMI the indicators light according to the signal being decoded see Display on page 14 Better sound using Phase Control This receiver s Phase Control feature uses phase correction measures to make sure your sound source arrives at the listening position in phase preventing unwanted distortion and or coloring of the sound Phase Control technology provides coherent sound reproduction through the use of phase matching for an opti mal sound image The default setting is on and we recommend leaving Phase Control switched on for all sound Sources 1 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode and then press AUDIO P 2 Use f toselect PHASE 3 Use to switch on phase correction The PHASE CONTROL indicator on the front panel lights A Notes e Phase matching is a very important factor in achieving proper sound reproduction If two waveforms are in phase they crest and trough together resulting in increased amplitude clarity and presence of the sound signal If a crest of a wave meets a trough then the sound will be out of phase and an unreliable sound image will be
170. ime can be selected from among 15 min 30 min 60 min and OFF The power turns off after there has been no signal and no operation for the selected time e ZONE2 The time can be selected from among 30 min 1 hour 3 hours 6 hours 9 hours and OFF The power turns off after the selected time e HDZONE The time can be selected from among 30 min 1 hour 3 hours 6 hours 9 hours and OFF The power turns off after the selected time A Note Depending on the connected devices the Auto Power Down function may not work properly due to excessive noise or other reasons Volume Setup You can set the maximum volume of this receiver or specify what the volume level will be when the power is turned on 1 Select Volume Setup from the Other Setup menu 2 Select the Power ON Level setting you want The volume can be set so that it is always set to the same level when the receiver s power is turned on e LAST default When the power is turned on the volume is set to the same level as when the power was last turned off e When the power is turned on the volume is set to minimum level e 80 0dB to 12 0dB Specify the volume to be set when the power is turned on in steps of 0 5 dB It is not possible to set a volume level greater than the value specified at Volume Limit setup see below 3 Select the Volume Limit setting you want Us
171. ion mode and then press HOME MENU A Graphical User Interface GUI screen appears on your TV Use and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items Press RETURN to exit the current menu e Press HOME MENU at any time to exit the HOME MENU 2 Select System Setup from the HOME MENU then press ENTER 3 Select MHL Setup from the System Setup menu 4 Select the Auto input switching from the MHL Setup menu 5 Use 9 to select the setting e OFF Does not automaticly switch to MHL input e ON Automatically switches to MHL input 6 Select OK then press ENTER The System Setup and Other Setup menus 2 Notes hisisonly valid tor MHL compatible devices supporting this function e When the power is on the MHL compatible device is charged This receiver supports charging of devices up to 0 9 A The Other Setup menu The Other Setup menu is where you can make customized settings to reflect how you are using the receiver 1 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode and then press HOME MENU A Graphical User Interface GUI screen appears on your TV Use and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items Press RETURN to exit the current menu 2 Select System Setup from the HOME MENU 3 Select Other Setup then press ENTER 4 Select the setting you want to adjust If you are doing this for the first time y
172. is to play for example music that has a high audio level with a lower power consump tion than usual e ECO MODE 2 Select this to play movies etc with a high ratio of low volume scenes and high volume scenes a large dynamic ratio with a lower power consumption than usual This mode provides greater power savings than ECO MODE 1 A Notes e The Front Stage Surround Advance F S SURROUND function allows you to create natural surround sound effects using just the front speakers and the subwoofer e When ECO MODE 1 or ECO MODE 2 is selected the front panel s display lights with the dimmest brightness e Since ECO MODE 1 and ECO MODE 2 reduce the power consumption the speakers are switched in function of the number of input channels Because of this a speaker switching sound clicking sound may be pro duced when the number of input channels is switched If this bothers you switch to a different listening mode e When using headphones SOUND RETRIEVER AIR only with the BT AUDIO input PHONES SURR ECO MODE 1 and ECO MODE 2 can be selected Listening to your system Using Stream Direct Use the Stream Direct modes when you want to hear the truest possible reproduction of a source All unneces sary signal processing is bypassed and you re left with the pure analog or digital sound source Processing differs depending on the input signal and whether or not surround back speakers are connected For details see Auto Surround ALC and St
173. ithout reverb measurement it is best to use the measurement results as a reference for your time setting For an optimal system calibration based on the direct sound coming from the speakers we recommend using the 30 50ms setting Use m w to select the setting Use f to switch between them Select the setting from the following time periods in milliseconds 0 20ms 10 30ms 20 40ms 30 50ms 40 60ms 50 70ms and 60 80ms This setting will be applied to all channels during calibration When you re finished select START It will take about 2 to 4 minutes for the calibration to finish After the Acoustic Calibration Equalization is set you are given the option to check the settings on screen The Advanced MCACC menu Checking MCACC Data At the procedure of Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC on page 37 the pro cedure of Automatic MCACC Expert on page 82 or after fine adjusting at Manual MCACC setup on page 84 you can check your calibrated settings using the GUI screen 1 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode and then press HOME MENU A Graphical User Interface GUI screen appears on your TV Use and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items Press RETURN to exit the current menu 2 Select MCACC Data Check from the HOME MENU 3 Select the setting you want to check Speaker Setting Used to check the settings of the spe
174. ity operation and or bus power with all USB mass storage devices and assumes no responsibility for any loss of data that may occur when connected to this receiver 1 Press STANDBY ON to switch on the receiver and your TV oee Connecting a USB device on page 32 About one minute is required between turning the power on and completion of startup Make sure the receiver is in standby when disconnecting the USB device 2 Press iPod USB on the remote control to switch the receiver to the iPod USB When the display shows the names of folders and files you re ready to play from the USB device A Note If an Over Current message lights in the display the power requirements of the USB device are too high for this receiver Try following the points below e Switch the receiver off then on again e Reconnect the USB device with the receiver switched off e Usea dedicated AC adapter supplied with the device for USB power If this doesn t remedy the problem it is likely your USB device is incompatible Playing back audio files stored on a USB memory device The maximum number of levels that you can select in Step 2 below is 9 e Note that non Roman characters in the playlist are displayed as 1 Use f to select a folder then press ENTER to browse that folder oreturn to the previous level any time press RETURN 2 Continue browsing until you arrive at what you want to play then press gt to start playback e Copyrigh
175. ived the following supplied accessories e Setup microphone cable 5 m e Remote control unit AAA size IEC R03 dry cell batteries to confirm system operation x2 AM loop antenna e FM wire antenna e Power cord e CD ROM e Quick start guide e Safety Brochure e Warranty sheet Handling the CD ROM Precautions For Use e This CD ROM is for use with a personal computer It cannot be used with a DVD player or music CD player Attempting to play this CD ROM with a DVD player or music CD player can damage speakers or cause impaired hearing due to the large volume License e Please agree to the Terms of Use indicated below before using this CD ROM Do not use if you are unwilling to consent to the terms of its use Terms of Use e Copyright to data provided on this CD ROM belongs to PIONEER HOME ELECTRONICS CORPORATION Unauthorized transfer duplication broadcast public transmission translation sales lending or other such matters that go beyond the scope of personal use or citation as defined by Copyright Law may be subject to punitive actions Permission to use this CD ROM is granted under license by PIONEER HOME ELECTRONICS CORPORATION General Disclaimer e PIONEER HOME ELECTRONICS CORPORATION does not guarantee the operation of this CD ROM with respect to personal computers using any of the applicable OS In addition PIONEER HOME ELECTRONICS CORPORATION is not liable for any damages incurred as a result of use of
176. ivers amplifiers etc this setting can be used to prevent other units from Change RC l l mede operating simultaneously when the remote control unit is operated See Operating multiple receivers on page 76 Preset codes can be set for the various input functions The remote control codes of a number of other devices including products of other brands are preset in the remote control to allow these devices to be operated See Selecting preset codes directly on page 76 If the desired operations cannot be performed even though you have set the preset codes the remote control signals of other devices can be learned directly See Programming signals from other remote controls on page 77 This function is used to erase remote control codes that have been learned Codes learned for the different input functions can be erased individually See Erasing one of the remote control button settings on page 71 This is a function for resetting preset codes that have been set Key resetting can be done for individual input functions See Erasing all learnt settings that are in one input function on page 78 Operation You can set to automatically switch to AV amplifier operation mode when a certain period of time elapses mode switching after remote operation of each input function is finished See Setting the switching time of AV amplifier time operation mode on page 78 This is a function for resetting all remote control unit settings you have made to th
177. k or off The OSD screen is not displayed Even through the input is switched DIGITAL does not light X DIGITAL or DTS does not light when playing Dolby DTS software When playing Dolby Digital or DTS Sources the receiver s format indica tors do not light When playing certain discs none of the receiver s format indicators light Calibration is performed but due to your speakers low frequency limitations no measur FAQ Remedy There are cases where the graph does not appear flat even when selecting ALL CH ADJ in the Auto MCACC Setup due to adjustments made to compensate for room character istics to achieve optimal sound Areas of the graph may appear identical before and after when there is little or no adjustment needed The graph may appear to have shifted vertically when comparing before and after mea surements Despite level adjustments being made the filters used for analysis may not display these adjustments in the reverb characteristics graph after EQ calibration However these adjustments are taken into account by the filters dedicated to overall system calibration Low frequencies used in bass management the subwoofer channel will not change for speakers that have been specified as SMALL in the configuration or do not output these frequencies able sound is output for display Press DIMMER repeatedly to select a different brightness The on screen display is not display
178. l Calibration EQ graphical OU EDD eoe teres ioo di ostende oM D M RE Dal re adeb S e bbs tenor AT 101 Bap r 101 REMO CONTO Mp H 102 mb c M ene ae 102 i E 103 mU Ei 0 NM TORT T T 103 Besse e E 104 Eo 104 NEWOLK NENNT 104 Wireless EAN E 106 14 Additional information Surround sound Toral mereen a a a EE aAa aA E aa aE A OAE TESE aE 108 E E E E e E A A a sees E E 108 PLOT Te I aa a 108 MIC dro E ERE nascar E E T E E E 108 ADOUFIFOO Trae E E E E E E A E E Tt 109 WINOOWS cee seme e E E E Qmm 109 i EEEE E T E 109 ABOUT IDIA ar E E E A E 109 ADo utSluetootN Wireless technology esee tundusssenn inaina iea n Ea e a E RI PR DU und 109 SONAE icense TUNG Scat sari aE s T 0 E E 110 Auto Surround ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal formats seen 110 wichtige Pee Po ME Tm vce a UNO RO 111 About messages displayed when using network functions eene eene nennen 112 Important information regarding the HDMI
179. l Wide Phase Control See Setting the Audio options on page 67 See Better sound using Phase Control on page 54 Virtual Depth i Setting the Audio options on page 67 Standing Wave See Setting the Audio options on page 67 See Setting the Audio options on page 67 Digital Video Converter Setting the Video options on page 69 Phase Control Plus See Setting the Video options on page 69 See Setting the Audio options on page 67 Pure Cinema 1 1 Auto Sound Retriever See SERE the options on page 69 see Setting the Audio options on page 67 Progressive Motion 1 ALC Auto Level Control See Setting ve Video on page 69 See Auto playback on page 52 Advanced Video Adjust 1 Front Stage Surround Advance See Setting the Video options on page 69 See Enjoying various types of playback using the listening modes on page 52 Auto Power Down Sound Retriever Air See he Other Setup menu on page 92 See Enjoying various types of playback using the listening modes on page 52 Dialog Enhancement See Setting the Audio options on page 67 Internet radio oee Listening to Internet radio stations on page 57 Additional information Specifications Audio Section Rated power output 1 kHz 6 Q 1 Front Center Surround Surround DECK sss esucius sosansasonctwnsmannuniesteanenneantdenad snnnunnennaunmepenededan wat 150 W per channel Rated power output 20 Hz to 20 kHz 8 Q 0 09 96 Front Center Surround Surround ba
180. l coated wire to the AM LOOP terminals without disconnecting the supplied AM loop antenna For the best possible reception suspend horizontally outdoors Outdoor antenna 1 Pull off the protective shields of both AM antenna wires F 71 2 Push open the tabs then insert one wire fully into each terminal then release the tabs to AM LOOP secure the AM antenna wires 3 Fixthe AM loop antenna to the attached stand To fix the stand to the antenna bend in the direction indicated by the arrow fig a then clip the loop onto the T Bmtoom stand fig b vinyl coated wire e f you plan to mount the AM antenna to a wall or other surface secure the stand with screws fig c before clipping the loop to the stand Make sure the reception is clear 4 Place the AM antenna on a flat surface and in a direction giving the best reception 5 Connect the FM wire antenna into the FM antenna socket For best results extend the FM antenna fully and fix to a wall or door frame Don t drape loosely or leave coiled up Connecting your equipment MULTI ZONE setup This receiver can power up to three independent systems in separate rooms after you have made the proper MULTI ZONE connections Different sources can be playing in three zones at the same time or depending on your needs the same source can also be used The main and sub zones have independent power the main zone power can be off while one or both of the sub zones is on and the
181. lated items can be checked For detail see Checking the Network Information on page 92 Operation Mode Setup Use this to select this receiver s operation mode For details see Operation Mode Setup on page 40 Basic playback Playing SONS tat sti eet nea catamaran anf RUE CE gens eins eee EUM NEZ EEUU DNE 43 Playing an uoc eR 44 Pl ying a USB device quete DE 45 Playing an MHL compatible device s seseeeeneeeeeeeeeeneeneeesnsneneeeeeeseseeeeesasaaeneeesssaeeeenesseseeees 46 Listening to the radio d eiui rta iruine ta iu a iR dci EM MM Ec ET eI EE 47 Music playback using Bluetooth wireless technology eeeeeeeeeee 48 Basic playback Playing a source Here are the basic instructions for playing a source such as a DVD disc with your home theater system STANDBY ON SOURCE CONTROL C3 USB ADPT ROKU vn nuro ES LISTENING MODE VOLUME 1 Switch on your system components and receiver Start by switching on the playback component for example a DVD player your TV and subwoofer if you have one then the receiver press STANDBY ON Make sure that the TV s video input is set to this receiver 2 Select the input function you want to play You can use the input function buttons on the remote control or the front panel INPUT SELECTOR dial e As necessary select the type of audio input signal page 54 3
182. lby Digital Surround EX the EX stands for EXtended is an extension of Dolby Digital encoding whereby a surround back channel is matrixed into the surround left right channels for 6 1 channel playback This allows for compatibility with Dolby Digital 5 1 channel decoding as well as for decoding using Dolby Digital EX Dolby Pro Logic IIx and Dolby Surround Dolby Pro Logic IIx is an improved version of the Dolby Pro Logic II and Dolby Pro Logic decoding system Dolby Surround is an encoding system which embeds surround sound information within a stereo soundtrack which a Dolby Pro Logic decoder can then use for enhanced surround listening with greater sound detail Dolby Pro Logic liz Adding a pair of speakers above the front left and right speakers adds expressiveness in the vertical direction to the previous horizontally oriented sound field The height channel strengthens the sound field s sense of three dimensionality and air producing presence and expansion DTS The DTS technologies are explained below See http www dts com for more detailed information DTS Digital Surround DTS Digital Surround is a 5 1 channel audio coding system from DTS Inc now widely used for DVD Video DVD Audio 5 1 music discs digital broadcasts and video games DTS HD Master Audio DTS HD Master Audio is a technology that delivers master audio sources recorded in a professional studio to listeners without any loss of data preserving audio quality DTS
183. ld be equal Angle The speakers should be horizontally symmetrical Orientation The orientation should be horizontally symmetrical In most homes however it is not possible to achieve this environment For the distance on this receiver it is pos sible to automatically correct the speaker distance electrically to a precision of 1 cm using the Full Auto MCACC Setup function page 37 Step 1 Speaker layout and distance adjustment Use speaker stands or the like to make sure the speakers are steady and leave at least 10 cm from the surround ing walls Position the speakers attentively so that the speakers on the left and right are at equal angles from the listening position center of the adjustments We recommend using cords etc when adjusting the layout Ideally all the speakers should be equidistant from the listening position 7 Note If the speakers cannot be set at equal distances on a circle use the Auto MCACC Setup speaker distance cor rection and Fine Speaker Distance functions to make them equalize the distance artificially Step 2 Adjusting the speaker height Adjust the heights angles of the different speakers Adjust so that the front speaker units reproducing mid and high frequencies is roughly at the height of the ears If the center speaker cannot be set at the same height as the front speakers adjust its angle of elevation to point it to the listening position Set surround speaker 1 so that it is not und
184. le when 480i signals are being input from the composite video jacks g Ifthe image doesn t match your monitor type adjust the aspect ratio on the source component or on the monitor e This setting is only displayed when 480i p or 576i p video signals are being input Using other functions Switching the output OUTPUT PARAMETER You can press OUT P to switch the output of speaker terminals or HDMI terminals to be played Switching the speaker terminals If you selected Normal SB FH Normal SB FW or Speaker B at Speaker system setting on page 89 you can switch between speakers using the OUT P button If you selected Front Bi Amp ZONE 2 or HDZONE the button will Simply switch your main speaker terminals on or off 1 Press OUTP e You can perform the same operation by pressing SPEAKERS on the front panel 2 Use f to select SP 3 Use to switch the speaker terminals to be played As mentioned above if you have selected Front Bi Amp ZONE 2 or HDZONE the button will simply switch your main speaker terminal A on or off Press repeatedly to choose a speaker terminal option When you select Normal SB FH you can select from e SP SB FH ON Surround back or front height channels are added to the front center and surround chan nels maximum 5 channels and a maximum of 7 channels are output The surround back and front height channels are switched automatically according to the audio input signal
185. less Fidelity is a trademark coined by the Wi Fi Alliance trade association to increase recognition of wireless LAN standards With the increase in the number of devices connected to computers in recent years Wi Fi offers the advantage of eliminating the complexity of making connections with LAN cables by using wire less connection As a way of reassuring users products that have passed interoperability tests carry the logo Wi Fi Certified to indicate that compatibility is assured WPS Abbreviation of Wi Fi Protected Setup A standard established by the Wi Fi Alliance industry group for a function allowing settings related to interconnection of WPS compatible wireless LAN devices and encryption to be made with simple operations There are a number of methods including push button configuration and PIN code con figuration This AV receiver supports both push button configuration and PIN code configuration SSID Abbreviation of Service Set IDentifier A wireless LAN access point identifier Can be set as desired using up to 32 characters of English letters and numbers Bluetooth function Bluetooth wireless technology A short range wireless communications standard for digital devices Information is exchanged between devices several meters to several tens of meters apart using radio waves It uses radio waves on the 2 4 GHz band which does not require applications for licenses or usage registration for applications conducting wireless exchang
186. ling the center speaker on the floor adjust its angle of elevation to point it towards the listening position Installation on floor Diagram as seen from the side e fthe center speaker is not of the shielded type install it away from the TV e When installing the center speaker on top of the monitor place it facing slightly downwards towards the listen ing position Additional information About messages displayed when using network functions Important information regarding the HDMI connection Refer to the following information when you come up with a status message while operating the Network There are cases where you may not be able to route HDMI signals through this receiver this depends on functions the HDMI equipped component you are connecting check with the manufacturer for HDMI compatibility RES information Status messages De cupiens If you aren t receiving HDMI signals properly through this receiver from your component please try one of the Connection Down The selected category or Internet radio station cannot be accessed following configurations when connecting up File Format Error Cannot be played back for some reasons Track Not Found The selected song has not been found anywhere on the network Configuration A Server Errar TAE Se ee se ae Use component video cables to connect the video output of your HDMI equipped component to the receiver s Server Disconnected The server has bee
187. listen to sources with no surround back channel information Virtual Height When you re not using front height speakers selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual front height channel through your front speakers Virtual Wide When you re not using front wide speakers selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual front wide channel through your front speakers Virtual Depth When this mode is selected the sound field expands virtually to behind the display resulting in a sound field with the same depth as the 3D picture to achieve a better sense of presence Auto Sound Retriever The Auto Sound Retriever feature employs DSP technology to restore sound pressure and smooth jagged arti facts left over after compression With some audio inputs the Sound Retriever effect is automatically optimized based on the bitrate information of the contents that have been input to achieve high sound quality Sound Retriever Air Sound Retriever Air compensates for reduced sound quality due to compression when sending G uetooth signals PQLS Jitterless high quality playback is possible by connecting a PQLS compatible player with HDMI connections ALC Auto Level Control In the Auto level control ALC mode this receiver equalizes playback sound levels Also the low and high frequency sounds dialogs surround effects etc that are difficult to hear when the vol ume is low are adjusted to be optimal for the volume level This mode is par
188. lowing browsers are supported Windows PC Internet Explorer 8 9 10 11 Mac OS iPad iPhone iPod touch Safari 6 0 Android device Android browser To use certain AVNavigator functions you must install the latest Adobe Flash Player For details visit the following website http www adobe com downloads e Depending on the computer network setting or security setting AVNavigator may not operate Using AVNavigator 1 Press STANDBY ON to switch on the receiver and your computer 2 Launch AVNavigator Operate AVNavigator by following the screen prompts of your computer etc e Ona Windows PC launch Internet Explorer and enter the IP address of this unit in the address field of Internet Explorer From Internet Explorer access the IP address http followed by the receiver s IP address You can display the IP address of the unit on the unit s display by pressing the STATUS button on the remote control e With a Windows PC other than Windows XP you can use the following method to launch AVNavigator Launch Explorer and right click lt VSX 924 gt displayed in the Network folder then click View device webpage Basic Setup e On a Mac launch Safari and click lt VSX 924 gt displayed in Bonjour on the Bookmarks bar f Bonjour is not displayed tick the Include Bonjour in the Favorites bar check box on the Advanced tab in the Safari Preferences menu
189. ls OPTICAL and COAXIAL and output them to ZONE 2 e When any of the INTERNET RADIO PANDORA Australian model only MEDIA SERVER FAVORITES or iPod USB inputs is selected in the main zone the input for ZONE 2 will be the same Inputs other than the ones listed above can be selected The same limitations apply when one of the above inputs is selected for ZONE 2 b The inputs that can be switched differ according to how terminals HDMI IN 1 to IN 6 are assigned Upon shipment from the factory the input terminals are assigned to DVD SAT CBL HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 and HDMI 6 in order starting from terminal HDMIIN 1 The video audio signals of the RCA analog input terminals the digital input terminals OPTICAL and COAXIAL and the COM PONENT VIDEO input terminals cannot be up converted and output to the HDZONE When any of the HDMI 3 to HDMI 6 MHL inputs is selected in the main zone it is only possible to select the same input as in the main zone for the HDZONE Inputs other than the ones listed here can be selected The same limitations apply when one of the above inputs is selected for the HDZONE e When any of the INTERNET RADIO PANDORA MEDIA SERVER FAVORITES or iPod USB inputs is selected in the main zone it is only possible to select the same input as in the main zone for the HDZONE Inputs other than the ones listed here can be selected The same limitations apply when one of the above inputs is selected for the HDZONE
190. lume Limit is set to OFF see Volume Setup on page 93 The channel level setting may be over 0 0dB Certain listening modes or HOME MENU items cannot be selected When Operation Mode is set to Basic the Pioneer recommended settings are made and not all of the functions can be used To use all of the functions without restrictions set Operation Mode to Expert see Operation Mode Setup on page 40 Some functions cannot be selected depending on the input signal and listening mode FAQ Symptom Remedy F Video The volume level drops automati The temperature within the unit has exceeded the allowable value Try moving the unit for cally better ventilation see Installing the receiver on page 9 Symptom Remedy Volume seems different when input Set the Channel Level setting to ALL then adjust the volume of the respective input No image is output when an input is Check the video connections of the source component a p 2 f s switched Surces see Input Volume Absorber on page 71 selected For HDMI or when V CONV is set to OFF and a TV and another component are con When HDZONE is ON multi channel When HDZONE is selected in Speaker System and also the same HDMI input is selected nected with different cords in Setting the Video options on page 69 you must connect audio sources are not outputinthe for both the main zone and HDZONE 2 channel PCM audio sources are output from the your TV to this recei
191. me input as with the main zone video is output with the lower resolution of the TV connected to HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2 When there is only one 4K compliant TV connect itto HDMI OUT 1 and set the HDMI output setting to OUT 1 or turn off HDZONE so that video is only output to the 4K compliant TV FAQ MHL Symptom Remedy When playing an MHL compat The MHL device will not operate unless power is being supplied from this receiver When ible device connected to the this receiver is in the Standby Through mode power cannot be supplied due to reduced HDMI 6 MHL terminal the Standby power consumption Because of this the MHL device will not operate This is not a mal Through function does not work and function the power turns off MHL compatible device cannot be Press MHL to set the remote control to the MHL control mode operated with the remote control MHL POW ERR is displayed on the display There is a problem with the power supply for the MHL device After turning OFF the receiver disconnect the MHL device connect the MHL device again and then turn ON the power of the receiver If the error is displayed even though the above operation is repeated several times there is a problem with the receiver or the MHL device Disconnect the power cable and request repair Built in AVNavigator Symptom Cause Remedy AVNavigator does not inter The receiver s power is not turned act well with the receive
192. me of your TV so that all sound is coming from the speakers connected to this receiver A Note Depending on the input to be played the playback operation can in some cases be performed using the on screen display The OSD display is only displayed when the receiver s HDMI OUT 1 terminal and the TV s HDMI input are con nected with an HDMI cable If the TV is connected with anything other than an HDMI cable watch the front panel display while performing the various operations and making settings Turning off the sound Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been muted adjusting the volume also restores the sound Press MUTE Playing a source with HDMI connection Use ALL to select the input function connected to the receiver s HDMI input terminals You can also perform the same operation by using the INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front panel or by pressing HDMI on the remote control repeatedly e Set the HDMI parameter in Setting the Audio options on page 67 to THROUGH if you want to hear HDMI audio output from your TV no sound will be heard from this receiver e If the video signal does not appear on your TV try adjusting the resolution settings on your component or dis play Note that some components such as video game units have resolutions that may not be converted In this case use an analog video connection Basic playback Playing an iPod Playing back audio files stored on an iPod To navi
193. n disconnected component video input The receiver can then convert the analog component video signal to a digital HDMI sig Empty There are no files stored in the selected folder nal for transmission to the display For this configuration use the most convenient connection digital is recom License Error The license for the contents to be played back is invalid mended for sending audio to the receiver See the operating instructions for more on audio connections Item Already Exists This is displayed when the file you have attempted to register in the Favorites folder has Note already been registered This is displayed when you have attempted to register a file in the Favorites folder but the The picture quality will change slightly during conversion Favorite List Full Mom Favorites folder is already full Configuration B Connect your HDMI equipped component directly to the display using an HDMI cable Then use the most conve nient connection digital is recommended for sending audio to the receiver See the operating instructions for more on audio connections Set the display volume to minimum when using this configuration 7 Notes e f your display only has one HDMI terminal you can only receive HDMI video from the connected component e Depending on the component audio output may be limited to the number of channels available from the connected display unit for example audio output is reduced to 2 channels for a monit
194. n mode when a certain period of time elapses after remote operation of each input function is finished 1 Press and hold RCU SETUP then press 5 for three seconds The LED flashes once 2 Press the number buttons of the time you wish to set e 1 Ihe mode is not automatically switched to AV amplifier operation mode e 2 Switches in five minute e 3 Switches in three minute e 4 Switches in one minute e 5 Switches in 30 seconds 3 Press RCU SETUP to exit the setup Resetting the remote control settings Use this procedure to reset all the remote control s settings to the factory default e When preset codes are set all the signals learned in the input function buttons are cleared This function is convenient when you want to reset some but not all of input function buttons 1 Press and hold RCU SETUP then press 0 for three seconds Release the button after the LED flashes once The LED continues to flash 2 Hold down the ENTER button for five seconds If the LED lights for one second the erasing has been successfully completed Default preset codes Input function button Preset code BD 2255 DVD 2197 HDMI 2144 TV 0305 CD 5000 SAT CBL 6329 TV INPUT 0305 ALL 2034 Controlling the rest of your system Controlling components TV and Audio Video components Li This remote control can control components after entering the proper codes see Setting the remote to control Button s TV TV
195. n operation that produces sound from the TV is performed from the TV s menu screen etc e When the TV s power is set to standby the receiver s power is also set to standby Only when the input for a component connected to the receiver by HDMI connection is selected or when watching the TV e The receiver s input switches automatically when the Control with HDMI compatible component is played e The receiver s input switches automatically when the TV s input is switched e he synchronized amp mode remains in effect even if the receiver s input is switched to a component other than one connected by HDMI The operations below can also be used on Pioneer Control with HDMI compatible TVs e When the receiver s volume is adjusted or the sound is muted the volume status is displayed on the TV s screen e When the OSD language is switched on the TV the receiver s language setting also switches accordingly Setting the PQLS function PQLS Precision Quartz Lock System is a digital audio signal transfer control technology using the Control with HDMI function It offers higher quality audio playback by controlling audio signals from the receiver to a PQLS compatible player etc This enables removing jitter that has a negative effect on the quality of the sound and is generated upon transmission e On players compatible with PQLS Bit stream PQLS always works for all sources e On players compatible with PQLS Multi Surround PQLS works for all
196. n step 7 e With error messages such as Too much ambient noise or Check microphone select RETRY after check ing for ambient noise see Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 38 and verifying the mic connection If there doesn t seem to be a problem you can simply select GO NEXT and continue la Full Auto MCACC la Full Auto MCACC AN RECEIVER En RECEIVER Now Analyzing 2 6 ese a Odes g Environment Check Ambient Noise OK Microphone j Sx 7 Speaker YES NO Q O Cancel 3 Cancel 3 The configuration shown on screen should reflect the actual speakers you have e f you see an ERR message or the speaker configuration displayed isn t correct there may be a problem with the speaker connection If selecting RETRY doesn t work turn off the power and check the speaker con nections If there doesn t seem to be a problem you can simply use to select the speaker and to change the setting and continue e f the speaker is not pointed to the microphone listening position or when using speakers that affect the phase dipole speakers reflective speakers etc Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the speakers are properly connected If Reverse Phase is displayed the speaker s wiring and may be inverted Check the speaker connections fthe connections were wrong turn off the power disconnect the power cord then reconnect properly After this perform the Full Auto MCACC proced
197. n when encoded in a compatible format some files may not play correctly e Movie or Photo files cannot be played back here are cases where you cannot listen to an Internet radio station even if the station can be selected from a list of radio stations e Some functions may not be supported depending on the server type or version used Supported file formats vary by server As such files not supported by your server are not displayed on this unit For more information check with the manufacturer of your server Disclaimer for Third Party Content Access to content provided by third parties requires a high speed internet connection and may also require account registration and a paid subscription Third party content services may be changed suspended interrupted or discontinued at any time without notice and Pioneer disclaims any liability in connection with such occurrences Pioneer does not represent or warrant that content services will continue to be provided or available for a particu lar period of time and any such warranty express or implied is disclaimed About playback behavior over a network e Playback may stall when the PC is switched off or any media files stored on it are deleted while playing content e f there are problems within the network environment heavy network traffic etc content may not be displayed or played properly playback may be interrupted or stalled For best performance a 100BASE TX connection
198. na 76 Operating multiple receivers Lease e esee eese e eee ne ne nennen nnn n nnn n nana n anna auarus arasssssr 76 Setting the remote to control other components eeeeeeeeeeeeee nennen nennen nn nnn nnn nnns 76 Selecting preset codes directly uosuscusescek id dtiu uai prado mask zv Vawk owe Pad ia ia napa vas SumUa dE Vu wav oL ES Rr V Ew U nnmnnn 76 Programming signals from other remote controls eeeeeeeeeereerseeeeee eene nnn 77 Erasing one of the remote control button settings 1eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eene 77 Erasing all learnt settings that are in one input function ceceeeesseeeeeeeeeee nenne 78 Using All Zone SCAG DY oeivntsssiscact ud eredi iion E Ec CDS EUR E uuU eH toS VENERE 78 Setting the switching time of AV amplifier operation mode 78 Resetting the remote control settings eeeeseeeeeieeeeeeeeeeeeeee eene n nennt nnne nnn nnn nnns 78 Controlling components ccs eases 79 Controlling the rest of your system About the Remote Setup menu The Remote Setup mode is set by pressing the number button while pressing RCU SETUP The different items on the Remote Setup menu are described below For their setting procedures refer to the explanations for the respective items Setting What it does If you have multiple Pioneer rece
199. nada TEL 1 877 283 5901 905 479 4411 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087 Keetberglaan 1 B 9120 Melsele Belgium TEL 03 570 05 11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE LTD 253 Alexandra Road 04 01 Singapore 159936 TEL 65 6472 7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY LTD 5 Arco Lane Heatherton Victoria 3202 Australia TEL 03 9586 6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S A DE C V Blvd Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col Lomas de Chapultepec Mexico D F 11000 TEL 55 9178 4270 K002_B3_En 2014 PIONEER HOME ELECTRONICS CORPORATION All rights reserved lt ARB7555 A gt
200. nal is being input 14 Input function indicators XL XR Two channels other than the ones above Light to indicate the input function you have selected e XC Either one channel other than the ones above the mono surround channel or matrix encode flag 15 Scroll indicators 3 Digital format indicators Light when there are more selectable items when making the various settings Light when a signal encoded in the corresponding format is detected 16 Speaker indicators e M DIGITAL Lights with Dolby Digital decoding Lights to indicate the current speaker system using OUT P page 71 e X DIGITAL PLUS Lights with Dolby Digital Plus decoding I TrueHD Lights with Dolby TrueHD decoding e DTS Lights with DIS decoding DTS HD Lights with DTS HD decoding 18 Matrix decoding format indicators e 96 24 Lights with DTS 96 24 decoding e I PRO LOGIC IIx This lights to indicate OO Pro Logic l I1 Pro Logic IIx decoding page 52 e DSD Lights during playback of DSD Direct Stream Digital signals e DSD PCM Light during DSD Direct Stream Digital to PCM conversion e PCM Lights during playback of PCM signals e MSTR Lights during playback of DIS HD Master Audio signals 20 Remote control mode indicator 3X CMUITTEPONIE Lights to indicate the receiver s remote control mode setting Not displayed when set to 1 page 93 Lights when the MULTI ZONE feature is active page 72 17 SLEEP Lights when the receiver is in slee
201. ndby mode 2 Turn the power on for all components with the power for the TV being turned on last 3 Choose the HDMI input to which the TV is connected to this receiver and see if video output from connected components displays properly on the screen or not 4 Check whether the components connected to all HDMI inputs are properly displayed About synchronized operations amp Important e Synchronized operations are enabled when Control Mode is set to ON after setting Control in HDMI Setup to ON For details see HDMI Setup on page 63 The Control with HDMI compatible component connected to the receiver operates in sync as described below e From the menu screen of the Control with HDMI compatible TV set audio to be played through this receiver and the receiver will switch to the synchronized amp mode e When in the synchronized amp mode you can adjust the receiver s volume or mute the sound using the TV s remote control e When in the synchronized amp mode the synchronized amp mode is canceled when the receiver s power is turned off To turn the synchronized amp mode back on set audio to be played through the receiver from the TV s menu screen etc This receiver will power up and switch to the synchronized amp mode e When the synchronized amp mode is canceled the receiver s power turns off if you were viewing an HDMI input or a IV program on the TV e When in the synchronized amp mode the synchronized amp mode is canceled if a
202. ne s you want e When the receiver is on make sure that any operations for the sub zone are done while ZONE and your selected sub zone s show in the display If this is not showing the front panel controls affect the main zone only If the receiver is in standby the display is dimmed and ZONE and your selected sub zone s continue to show in the display 3 Use the INPUT SELECTOR dial to select the source for the sub zone For example ZONE 2 DVD sends the source connected to the DVD inputs to the sub room ZONE 2 e f you select TUNER you can use the tuner controls to select a preset station see Saving station presets on page 47 if you re unsure how to do this The tuner cannot be tuned to more than one station at a time Therefore changing the station in one zone also changes the station in the other zone Please be careful not to change stations when recording a radio broadcast 4 Use the MASTER VOLUME dial to adjust the volume for the sub zone When Speaker System is set to anything other than ZONE 2 the volume output from the receiver s AUDIO ZONE 2 OUT terminals can be fixed to 40 dB or 0 dB and the volume can be adjusted from the connected ampli fier If you want to adjust the volume from the connected amplifier see ZONE Setup on page 94 5 When you re finished press MULTI ZONE CONTROL again to return to the main zone controls You can also press MULTI ZONE ON OFF on the front panel to switch off all output to the sub zone
203. nected to the B speaker terminals and the subwoofer The sound from the B speaker termi nals will be the same as the sound from the A speaker terminals multichannel sources will be downmixed to 2 channels e SP OFF No sound is output from the speakers A Notes e The subwoofer output depends on the settings you made in Manual speaker setup on page 89 However if SP B ON is selected above no sound is heard from the subwoofer the LFE channel is not downmixed e All speaker systems except Speaker B connections are switched off when headphones are connected Switching the HDMI output Set which terminal to use when outputting video and audio signals from the HDMI output terminals The HDMI OUT 1 terminal is compatible with the Control with HDMI function 1 Press OUTP 2 Use f toselect OUT 1 2 3 Use to select the setting Please wait a while when Please wait is displayed The output switches among OUT 1 2 OUT 1 OUT 2 and OFF each time the button is pressed e The synchronized amp mode is canceled when the HDMI output is switched If you wish to use the synchro nized amp mode switch to OUT 1 then select the synchronized amp mode on the TV using the TV s remote control e When MAIN HDZONE is set to HDZONE it is not possible to switch to OUT 2 page 94 Changing the channel level while listening Using the channel level settings you can adjust the overall balance of your speaker system an important f
204. ning on off the device connected to this units HDMI OUT terminal during playback or disconnecting con necting the HDMI cable during playback may cause noise or interrupted audio The terms HDMI and HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries x v Color and x v Color are trademarks of Sony Corporation Connecting your equipment When the TV and receiver are connected by HDMI connections if the TV supports the HDMI ARC Audio Return Channel function the sound of the TV can be input to the receiver via the HDMI OUT terminal so there is no need to connect an audio cable In this case set ARC at HDMI Setup to ON see HDMI Setup on p page 63 Connecting vn HDMI After setting the ARC some time may be required for the connected device to be recognized and the sound to be produced f you use a coaxial digital audio cable or RCA analog audio cable you ll need to tell the receiver which digi tal or analog audio input you connected the TV to see Ihe Input Setup menu on page 39 Please refer to the TV s operation manual for directions on connections and setup for the TV Connecting your TV and playback components If you have an HDMI or DVI with HDCP equipped component Blu ray Disc player BD etc you can connect it to this receiver using a commercially available HDMI cable If the TV
205. nnect speakers to the front left and right channels L and R e tis also possible to only connect one of the surround back speakers SB or neither e f you have two subwoofers the second subwoofer can be connected to the SUBWOOFER 2 terminal Connecting two subwoofers increases the bass sound to achieve more powerful sound reproduction In this case the same sound is output from the two subwoofers Choose one from Plans A to E below amp Important e The Speaker System setting must be made if you use any of the connections shown below other than A see Speaker system setting on page 89 e The speakers from which sound is output can be switched according to the speaker layout usage pattern sound is not necessarily output from all connected speakers Use the OUT P button to switch the speakers from which sound is output For details see Switching the speaker terminals on page 71 This plan replaces the left and right front height speakers shown in A with the left and right front wide speakers A 7 2 channel surround system Front height FWL FWR It is not possible to produce sound simultaneously from the front wide speakers and the surround back speakers This surround system provides a sound field with good association between the sounds of the different channels Default setting Speaker System setting Normal SB FH C 7 2 channel surround system amp Speaker B connection Speaker System setting Spe
206. ntan Rr c irr 61 Playback with NETWORK features Introduction This receiver is equipped with the LAN terminal and you can enjoy the following features by connecting your components to these terminals Listening to Internet radio stations You can select and listen to your favorite Internet radio station from the list of Internet radio stations created edited and managed by the vl uner database service exclusively for use with the Pioneer products See Playback with Network functions on page 57 and Listening to Internet radio stations on page 57 Playback the music files stored in PCs You can playback a lot of musics stored in your PCs using this unit e Besides a PC you can also play back audio files stored on your other components with the built in media server function based on DLNA 1 0 or DLNA 1 5 framework and protocols i e network capable hard disks and audio systems See Playback with Network functions on page 57 and Playing back audio files stored on components on the network on page 59 Listening to Pandora Internet Radio See Listening to Pandora Internet Radio on page 58 Listening to Spotify audio streaming playback See About the Spotify audio stream playback function on page 59 A Notes e To listen to Internet radio stations you must sign a contract with an ISP Internet Service Provider beforehand e Photo or video files cannot be played back e With Windows Media Player 11 or Win
207. nterface GUI screen appears on your TV Use and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items Press RETURN to exit the current menu 2 Select System Setup from the HOME MENU 3 Select Input Setup from the System Setup menu 4 S ystem Setup AN RECEIVER a Manual SP Setup c OSD Language d Network Setup e HDMI Setup f MHL Setup g Other Setup 4b Input Setup AN RECEIVER Input AE DVD gt Input Name E Rename Input Skip 5 OFF Audio In 5 COAX 1 HDMI Input 1 Input 1 Component In a In 1 Return 3 Return 4 Select the input function that you want to set up The default names correspond with the names next to the terminals on the rear panel such as DVD or SAT CBL which in turn correspond with the names on the remote control 5 Select the input s to which you ve connected your component For example if your DVD player only has an optical output you will need to change the DVD input function s Audio In setting from COAX 1 default to the optical input you ve connected it to 6 When you re finished proceed to the settings for other inputs There are optional settings in addition to the assignment of the input jacks Input Name You can choose to rename the input function for easier identification Select Rename to do so or Default to return to the system default e Input Skip When set to ON that input is skipped when selecting the input using ALL DVD and other inputs can b
208. ntrol the sub zone from the main zone page 72 5 Character display See Display on page 14 6 TUNER controls e BAND Switches between AM and FM radio bands page 47 e TUNER EDIT Use with TUNE 4 PRESET and ENTER to memorize and name stations for recall page 47 e TUNE 1 4 Find radio frequencies page 47 e PRESET Find preset stations page 47 7 Remote sensor Receives the signals from the remote control page 10 8 MASTER VOLUME dial 9 PHONES jack Use to connect headphones When the headphones are connected there is no sound output from the speakers 10 MCACC SETUP MIC jack Use to connect the supplied microphone page 37 11 SPEAKERS Use to change the speaker terminal page 71 12 Listening mode buttons e AUTO SURR ALC STREAM DIRECT Switches between Auto Surround page 52 Auto Level Control and Stream Direct mode page 53 e STANDARD SURROUND Press for Standard decoding and to switch various modes OM Pro Logic Neo X Stereo etc page 52 e ADVANCED SURROUND Use to switch between the various surround modes page 53 13 STATUS Displays the IP address and information such as selected set functions and the input signal on the display page 19 14 iPod iPhone DIRECT CONTROL Change the receiver s input to the iPod and enable iPod operations on the iPod page 44 15 iPod iPhone terminals Use to connect your Apple iPod iPhone as an audio source page 32 or connect a USB devi
209. ntsinsiasNxenan etn Ended stu EO E i RUNI eid I NEQNE 104 Wireless LAN 106 Troubleshooting Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions If you think that there is something wrong with this component check the points below Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component Investigate the other components and electrical appliances being used If the trouble cannot be rectified even after exercis ing the checks listed below ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent service company to carry out repair work e Ifthe unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnect the power plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions If the problem is not solved after the troubleshooting below if the screen freezes unexpectedly or if the buttons on the remote control or front panel stop working completely do the following e Press STANDBY ON on the front panel to turn off the power then turn the power back on If this does not solve the problem turn off the power again then press and hold the STANDBY ON button on the front panel for at least five seconds The power turns on then turns off after five seconds e f the power cannot be turned off press and hold STANDBY ON on the front panel for over five seconds The power will turn off In this case the various settings made on the recei
210. odifications without notice due to improvements This product includes FontAvenue fonts licensed by NEC Corporation FontAvenue is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation IOS is a trademark on which Cisco holds the trademark right in the US and certain other countries Microsoft Windows Windows Media and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Android and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc Corporation and product names mentioned herein are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective corporations Additional information Preset code list You should have no problem controlling a component if you find the manufacturer in this list but please note that there are cases where codes for the manufacturer in the list will not work for the model that you are using There are also cases where only certain functions may be controllable after assigning the proper preset code amp Important e We do not guarantee the operations of all the manufacturers and devices listed Operation may not be possible even if a preset code is entered If you can t find a preset code that matches the component you want to control you can still teach the remote individual commands from another remote control see Programming signals from other remote controls on page 77 TV Pioneer 0113 0233 0252 0275 0291 0295 0296 0305 A R
211. on Guide which visually and intelligibly explains the operation method iControlAV5 Remote Application This is an application that allows intuitive operation of many of the receiver s functions This application is avail able on the App Store for iPhone iPod touch and iPad You can also get it on Google Play for Android smart phones The application can be downloaded free of charge HDZONE output This receiver supports output of the HDMI output to a subzone room Powerful images can be enjoyed simply by connecting this receiver to a TV supporting 4K Full HD SD In addition a multi channel environment can be cre ated by connecting this receiver to another AV receiver in the subzone room ZONE Ready This receiver is equipped with HDZONE and ZONE 2 HDZONE supports HD audio video streaming to a separate room via HDMI Multi Zone enables music and movie playback from different sources in three zones at the same time With HDZONE you can select not only HDMI input but also INTERNET RADIO or iPod USB and the like Energy Saving Design This AV receiver has an ecological design In addition to even lower power consumption in standby the receiver is equipped with an eco mode for low power consumption when playing contents as well Furthermore the eco mode can easily be set with a dedicated button on the remote control of using iControlAV5 Before you start Checking what s in the box Please check that you ve rece
212. on is not used with this unit HDZONE remote controls Before operation hold down HDZ on the remote control for 1 5 seconds until the remote control LED flashes one time The following table shows the possible HDZONE remote controls Button s What it does oO Switches on off power in the HDZONE ALL Use to select the input function in the HDZONE Use to select the input function directly this may not work for some functions in the Input function buttons HDZONE Mos xs Use to set the listening volume in the HDZONE MUTE Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been muted adjusting the volume also lt a gt restores the sound a You can operate this only when Speaker System is set to HDZONE Using other functions Network settings from a web browser Checking your system settings Network settings and Pandora account settings can be made using the browser on a computer connected to the Use the status display screen to check your current settings for features such as surround back channel process same LAN as the receiver ing and your current MCACC preset 1 Press STANDBY ON to switch on the receiver 1 Press STATUS 2 Turn on the computer s power and launch the Internet browser 2 Use f 4 to check the system setting The information on the main unit display switches as shown below each time one of the buttons is pressed IP address Audio format Sampling frequency MCACC memory gt Auto phase
213. one DNS server address provided by your ISP on paper enter it in the Primary DNS Server field In case there are more than two DNS server addresses enter Secondary DNS Server in the other DNS server address field Proxy Hostname Proxy Port This setting is required when you connect this receiver to the Internet via a proxy server Enter the IP address of your proxy server in the Proxy Hostname field Also enter the port number of your proxy server in the Proxy Port field 1 Select IP Address Proxy from the Network Setup menu 2 Select the DHCP setting you want When you select ON the network is automatically set up and you do not need to follow Steps 3 Proceed with Step 4 If there is no DHCP server on the network and you select ON this receiver will use its own Auto IP function to determine the IP address e The IP address determined by the Auto IP function is 169 254 X X You cannot listen to an Internet radio sta tion if the IP address is set for the Auto IP function 3 Enter the IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Primary DNS Server and Secondary DNS Server Press f to select a number and to move the cursor 4 Select OFF or ON for the Enable Proxy Server setting to deactivate or activate the proxy server In case you select OFF proceed with Step 7 In case you select ON on the other hand proceed with Step 5 5 Enter the address of your proxy server or the domain name Use
214. ontrol on the screen and you can view function explanations or videos Explanations of the functions that are operated using the remote control are also automatically displayed e Network Setup Used to make network related settings Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC The Full Auto MCACC Setup measures the acoustic characteristics of your listening area taking into account ambient noise speaker connection and speaker size and tests for both channel delay and channel level After you have set up the microphone provided with your system the receiver uses the information from a series of test tones to optimize the speaker settings and equalization for your particular room amp Important e Make sure the microphone and speakers are not moved during the Full Auto MCACC Setup e Using the Full Auto MCACC Setup will overwrite any existing settings for the MCACC preset you select e Before using the Full Auto MCACC Setup the headphones should be disconnected e The OSD display is only displayed when the receiver s HDMI OUT 1 terminal and the TV s HDMI input are connected with an HDMI cable If the TV is connected with anything other than an HDMI cable watch the front panel display while performing the various operations and making settings A CAUTION e The test tones used in the Full Auto MCACC Setup are output at high volume Basic Setup 1 Press STANDBY ON to switch on the receiver and y
215. ontrol with HDMI compatible components However we do not guarantee that all synchronized operations will work with components that support the Control with HDMI function Use a High Speed HDMI cable when you want to use the Control with HDMI function The Control with HDMI function may not work properly if a different type of HDMI cable is used e For details about concrete operations settings etc refer to also the operating instructions for each component Making Control with HDMI connections You can use synchronized operation for a connected TV and other components e Be sure to connect the TV s audio cable to the audio input of this unit When the TV and receiver are connected by HDMI connections if the TV supports the HDMI ARC Audio Return Channel function the sound of the TV is input to the receiver via the HDMI OUT 1 terminal so there is no need to connect an audio cable In this case set ARC at HDMI Setup to ON see HDMI Setup on page 63 For details see Connecting your TV and playback components on page 24 amp Important e When connecting this system or changing connections be sure to switch the power off and disconnect the power cord from the wall socket After completing all connections connect the power cords to the wall socket After this receiver is connected to an AC outlet a 2 second to 10 second HDMI initialization process begins You cannot carry out any operations during this process The HDMI
216. ope in decibels per octave starting at 2 kHz The sound becomes less bright as the slope increases to a maximum of 3 0dB oct Use the following guidelines to set the X Curve according to your room size ud X Curve e f you select OFF the frequency curve will be flat and the X Curve has no effect 3 When you re finished press RETURN The System Setup and Other Setup menus Network Setup menu Make the settings for connecting the receiver to the Internet and using the network functions 1 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode and then press HOME MENU A Graphical User Interface GUI screen appears on your TV Use and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items Press RETURN to exit the current menu 2 Select System Setup from the HOME MENU 3 Select Network Setup from the System Setup menu 4 Select the setting you want to adjust If you are doing this for the first time you may want to adjust these settings in order IP Address Proxy Sets up the IP address Proxy of this receiver page 91 Network Standby Allows the AVNavigator function to be used even when the receiver is in the standby mode page 91 e Friendly Name The name of the receiver displayed on a computer or other device connected to the network can be changed page 91 e Parental Lock Restricts usage of network functions page 92 IP address Proxy setting
217. opying the settings From then specify where you want to copy them To Make sure you don t overwrite an MCACC preset you re currently using this can t be undone 4 Select OK to confirm and copy the settings When MCACC Memory Copy is displayed select YES If NO is selected the memory is not copied Completed shows in the GUI screen to confirm the MCACC preset has been copied then you automatically return to the Data Management setup menu Clearing MCACC presets If you are no longer using one of the MCACC presets stored in memory you can choose to clear the calibration settings of that preset 1 Select MCACC Memory Clear from the Data Management setup menu 2 Select the MCACC preset you want to clear Make sure you don t clear an MCACC preset you re currently using this can t be undone 3 Select OK to confirm and clear the preset When MCACC Memory Clear is displayed select YES If NO is selected the memory is not cleared Completed shows in the GUI screen to confirm the MCACC preset has been cleared then you automatically return to the Data Management setup menu The System Setup and Other Setup menus Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu eren nnn 89 Manual speaker SetuP 89 Network Setup Menu acca ase acres asec cee set ce ewan cet ee 91 Checking the Network Information cccceeeesesseee
218. or with stereo audio limitations e f you want to switch the input function you ll have to switch functions on both the receiver and your display unit e Since the sound is muted on the display when using the HDMI connection you must adjust the volume on the display every time you switch input functions Cleaning the unit Use a polishing cloth or dry cloth to wipe off dust and dirt e When the surface is dirty wipe with a soft cloth dipped in some neutral cleanser diluted five or six times with water and wrung out well and then wipe again with a dry cloth Do not use furniture wax or cleansers e Never use thinners benzene insecticide sprays or other chemicals on or near this unit since these will cor rode the surface Additional information Manufacturer PIONEER HOME ELECTRONICS CORPORATION 1 1 Shin ogura Saiwai ku Kawasaki shi Kanagawa 212 0031 Japan Declaration of Conformity with regard to the R amp TTE Directive 1999 5 EC EU Representative s Pioneer Europe NV Haven 1087 Keetberglaan 1 9120 Melsele Belgium http www pioneer eu CE VSX 924 K VSX 924 S English Hereby Pioneer declares that this is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC Suomi Pioneer vakuuttaa taten etta tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999 5 EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sita koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen Nede
219. oshiba 6240 Auna 6175 Kabel Deutschland 6224 Paragon 6240 UPC 6270 Austar 6276 Macab 6260 Philips 6260 6270 US Electronics 6276 Bell amp Howell 6266 Madritel 6175 Pulsar 6240 Virgin Media 6225 6221 Birmingham Cable Magnavox 6266 Runco 6240 Visiopass 6260 Communications 6276 Memorex 6240 Sagem 6260 Zenith 6240 Cablecom 6270 Motorola 6276 Salora 6240 Ziggo 6208 Fosgate 6276 Nokia 6208 Samsung 6221 6240 France Telecom 6260 Noos 6260 Scientific Atlanta 6225 Freebox 6274 NTL 6276 6221 StarHub 6276 Cable Set Top Box Cable PVR Combination Freebox 6274 Nokia 6208 Telewest 6225 UPC 6270 Humax 6248 6224 Scientific Atlanta 6225 Thomson 6270 CD R Pioneer 5001 5053 5071 Philips 5054 Yamaha 5055 Laser Disc Player Pioneer 5002 5003 5004 5005 5006 5007 5008 5009 5010 Cassete Deck Pioneer 5058 5059 Digital Tape Pioneer 5057 MD Pioneer 5056 Network Audio Player Pioneer 5063 Game X Box 2313 AV Receiver Pioneer 5096 ID 1 5097 ID 2 5098 ID 3 5099 ID 4 Virgin Media 6225 Discover the benefits of registering your product online at http www pioneer eu or http www pioneer co uk PIONEER HOME ELECTRONICS CORPORATION 1 1 Shin ogura Saiwai ku Kawasaki shi Kanagawa 212 0031 Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS USA INC P O BOX 1540 Long Beach California 90801 1540 U S A TEL 800 421 1404 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA INC 340 Ferrier Street Unit 2 Markham Ontario L3R 2Z5 Ca
220. ou may want to adjust these settings in order e Auto Power Down Sets the power to turn off automatically when the receiver is not being used page 92 e Volume Setup Sets up the volume related operations of this receiver page 93 e Remote Control Mode Setup Sets this receiver s remote control mode page 93 Software Update Use to update the receiver s software and check the version page 93 e ZONE Setup Use to make the sub zone related settings page 94 On Screen Display Setup Sets whether or not to display the status on the display when the receiver is oper ated page 94 Play ZONE Setup Select the zone for playing the audio contents of devices in the home network page 94 5 Make the adjustments necessary for each setting pressing RETURN to confirm after each screen Auto Power Down The power can be set to turn off automatically if no operation has been performed for a specific amount of time with no audio or video signals being input to the receiver When using ZONE 2 or HDZONE the ZONE 2 or HDZONE power can also be set to turn off but for ZONE 2 or HDZONE the power turns off automatically after the amount of time set here even if signals are being input or operations have been performed Different times can be set for the main zone ZONE 2 and HDZONE 1 Select Auto Power Down from the Other Setup menu 2 Select the zone you want to set and set the time after which the power turns off e MAIN The t
221. our TV Make sure that the TV s video input is set to this receiver 2 Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC jack on the front panel Microphone Tripod Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone If you have a tripod use it to place the microphone so that it s about ear level at your normal listening position If you do not have a tripod use some other object to install the microphone Install the microphone on a stable floor Placing the microphone on any of the following surfaces may make accurate measurement impossible e Sofas or other soft surfaces e High places such as tabletops and sofa tops The Full Auto MCACC display appears once the microphone is connected la Full Auto MCACC AN RECEIVER Speaker System Normal SB FH MLMEMORY 1 Measurement Type Basic START Return e f you leave the GUI screen for over five minutes the screen saver will appear 3 Select the parameters you want to set If the speakers are connected using any setup other than Normal SB FH be sure to set Speaker System before the Full Auto MCACC Setup See Speaker system setting on page 89 Speaker System Shows the current settings When this is selected and ENTER is pressed the speaker system selection screen appears Select the proper speaker system then press RETURN to return If you are planning on bi amping your front speakers or
222. our network connection and or your connected equipment Please contact your Internet service provider or network device manufacturer A separate contract with payment to an Internet service provider is required to use the Internet Thank you for buying this Pioneer product Please read through these operating instruc tions so you will know how to operate your mode properly Contents 01 Before you start Eel CT cannons 7 bia Ti ae es d TERRE dO o RTT 9 in ce NG Ts Bd ged recevor IT TO Lm 9 respicis cuis d E OO OO TEL LTEM 9 Operating range of remote control Mio MM 10 02 Controls and displays aiae fspiucMe c sgis ei E A EEEE E AAEREN EE ATOA EERE TAE a A A 12 Bra a a E E 14 Font STI a TEE 15 03 Connecting your equipment Beg euet eso NENNT PEE 17 Reak Danek a UN 17 Determining the speakers Spp SU DITsccedeeu betonen itum Clm ek colin b Fete oU PUER DA ERR ARH vec 18 Placing Ie SEES B cape pects titi cds eer uid ur ita tasto Los od b Dd 20 Connecung We Speaker S s tem REDE MER RUE MN EMILE EM DENEN U DM INDIEN UN NNUS 20 ISERIES VOU Speaker SUSIDBITIG unpaid tthe sisal lao MUR bd wouldnt cR DER ni 21 Selecting thespeaker System eani a a a aa a UNE 22 i ge sie Audio GLH OIA rc aa EPE EA OTET TENE DE aA IAEA ERNEA a ARAETA Aa ETEDI Ta 22 ed i vide ON VN sereia 23 ADOUTCAH
223. our speakers ANALOG NPUT CD player etc Front channel amplifier ANALOG T f INPUT Powered re subwoofer 1 Select one AUDIO OUT DIGITAL OUT R ANALOG L OPTICAL COAXIAL m mb Powered fe subwoofer 2 e f you re not using a subwoofer change the front speaker setting see Speaker Setting on page 86 to LARGE e f you have two subwoofers the second subwoofer can be connected to the SUBWOOFER 2 terminal Connecting two subwoofers increases the bass sound to achieve more powerful sound reproduction In this case the same sound is output from the two subwoofers o hear sound only from the pre outs switch the speaker terminals to SP OFF page 1 or simply discon nect any speakers that are connected directly to the receiver a NE CD ASSIGNABLE e f your turntable has line level outputs i e it has a built in phono pre amp connect it to the ANALOG IN 1 CD inputs instead Connecting your equipment Connecting AM FM antennas Connecting external antennas Connect the AM loop antenna and the FM wire antenna as shown below To improve reception and sound quality To improve FM reception connect an external FM antenna to FM UNBAL 75 Q connect external antennas see Connecting external antennas on page 29 15 Q coaxial cable To improve AM reception connect a 5 m to 6 m length of viny
224. p Important When the INTERNET RADIO PANDORA Australian model only or FAVORITES input is selected the setting made here cannot be reflected 1 Select Parental Lock from the Network Setup menu 2 Input the password Use T to select a character to set the position and ENTER to confirm your selection 3 Specify whether to turn Parental Lock on or off e OFF Internet services are not restricted e ON Internet services are restricted 4 Ifyou want to change the password select Change Password In this case the procedure returns to step 2 Checking the Network Information The setting status of the following network related items can be checked e IP Address Check the IP address of this receiver e MAC Address Check the MAC address of this receiver Friendly Name Friendly Name on page 91 1 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode and then press HOME MENU A Graphical User Interface GUI screen appears on your TV Use and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items Press RETURN to exit the current menu 2 Select Network Information from the HOME MENU Display the setting status of the network related items MHL Setup Select whether or not to switch the input automatically to the MHL input when an MHL compatible device is connected e Default setting ON 1 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operat
225. p menu Fine Speaker Distance e Default setting 3 00 m all speakers For proper sound depth and separation with your system it is necessary to add a slight bit of delay to some speakers so that all sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same time You can adjust the distance of each speaker in 1 cm increments The following setting can help you make detailed adjustments that you may not achieve using the Manual speaker setup on page 89 1 Select Fine SP Distance from the Manual MCACC setup menu 2 Adjust the distance of the left channel from the listening position 3 Select each channel in turn and adjust the distance as necessary Use to adjust the delay of the speaker you selected to match the reference speaker Listen to the reference speaker and use it to measure the target channel From the listening position face the two speakers with your arms outstretched pointing at each speaker Try to make the two tones sound as if they are arriving simultaneously at a position slightly in front of you and between your arm span e f you can t seem to achieve this by adjusting the distance setting you may need to change the angle of your speakers very slightly e The subwoofer s test tone differs in tone from other channels Adjust so that the sound of the subwoofer can be heard distinctly Note that when adjusting the subwoofer depending on the low frequency response of your speaker it may be difficult to hear the change ev
226. p mode page 73 19 Character display Displays various system information 5 SOUND Lights when the DIALOG E Dialog Enhancement or TONE tone controls features is selected page 67 6 PQLS Lights when the PQLS feature is active page 64 7 S RTRV Lights when the Auto Sound Retriever function is active page 67 Controls and displays Front panel 1 2 3 4 SS e a LUIILI LGi LA Pioneer ADVANCED MCACC FL OFF il il O O o oe E SPEAKERS CONTROL MULTI ZONE ON OFF BAND TUNER EDIT 4 TUNE PRESET gt Y JE J J E 1 BJ Oe Oe AUTO SURR ALC STANDARD ADVANCED iPod iPhone STREAM DIRECT SURROUND SURROUND STATUS DIRECT CONTROL m oO 0 90 A e SELECTOR VOLUME STANDBY ON PHONES Te iic lt 5V 1A HDMI 5 INPUT O D 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 STANDBY ON This switches between standby and on for this receiver 2 INPUT SELECTOR dial Use to select an input function 3 Indicators e ADVANCED MCACC Lights when EQ is set to ON in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu page 67 e FLOFF Lights when off nothing displayed is selected with the display s dimmer adjustment page 73 e HDMI Blinks when connecting an HDMI equipped component lights when the component is connected page 24 e iPod iPhone Lights to indicate iPod iPhone is connected page 32 4 MULTI ZONE controls If you ve made MULTI ZONE connections page 30 use these controls to co
227. p to OFF For details see HDMI Setup on page 63 e You must select HDZONE in Speaker system setting page 89 to use this setup 1 Connect a pair of speakers to the surround back speaker terminals You should have a pair of speakers attached to the surround back speaker terminals as shown below 2 Connect a TV monitor to the HDMI OUT 2 HDZONE terminal on this receiver Sub zone HDZONE Main zone OUT2 OUT1 HDZONE CONTROL SURROUND BACK HDZONE Single Connecting your equipment Connecting to the network through LAN interface By connecting this receiver to the network via the LAN terminal you can listen to Internet radio stations To listen to Internet radio stations you must sign a contract with an ISP Internet Service Provider beforehand When connected in this way you can play audio files stored on the components on the local network including your computer A WAN Router 3 Y LAN cable sold separately to LAN port Connect the LAN terminal on this receiver to the LAN terminal on your router with or without the built in DHCP server function with a straight LAN cable CAT 5 or higher Turn on the DHCP server function of your router In case your router does not have the built in DHCP server func tion it is necessary to set up the network manually For details see Network Setup menu on page 91 LAN terminal specifications e LAN terminal Ethernet jack
228. page 32 This receiver s remote control buttons can be used for basic playback of files stored on an iPod About one minute is required between turning the power on and completion of startup e tis also possible to operate the iPod on the iPod itself without using the TV screen For details see Switching the iPod controls on page 44 2 Press iPod USB on the remote control to switch the receiver to the iPod USB When the display shows the names of folders and files you re ready to play music from the iPod e The controls of your iPod will be inoperable when connected to this receiver g o v Aa Switching the iPod controls You can switch over the iPod controls between the iPod and the receiver 1 Press HOME MENU to switch the iPod controls This enables operation and display on your iPod and this receiver s remote control and GUI screen become inactive 2 Press HOME MENU again to switch back to the receiver controls A Note Change the receiver s input to the iPod in one action by pressing the iPod iPhone DIRECT CONTROL button on the front panel to enable iPod operations on the iPod Basic playback Playing a USB device It is possible to play files using the USB interface on the front of this receiver e Compatible USB devices include external magnetic hard drives portable flash memory drives particularly key drives and digital audio players MP3 players of format FAT16 32 e Pioneer cannot guarantee compatibil
229. player s operating instructions Sound Retriever Link When playing a compressed audio file on the player the file s bitrate information is acquired using the Control with HDMI function and the sound is optimized on the receiver based on this information To activate the Sound Retriever Link function make the setting below 1 Setthe HDMI Setup s Control to ON and set the Control Mode setting to ON See HDMI Setup on page 63 2 Set the S RTRV Auto Sound Retriever setting to ON See Setting the Audio options on page 67 Stream Smoother Link Using the Control with HDMI function the receiver automatically detects whether a compressed video file is being played on the player and if so automatically activates the Stream Smoother function To activate the Stream Smoother Link function make the setting below 1 Set the HDMI Setup s Control to ON and set the Control Mode setting to ON See HDMI Setup on page 63 2 Set the STREAM Stream Smoother setting to AUTO See Setting the Video options on page 69 Cautions on the Control with HDMI function e Connect the TV directly to this receiver Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or an AV converter such as an HDMI switch can cause operational errors e Only connect components Blu ray Disc player etc you intend to use as a source to the HDMI input of this receiver Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or an AV converter such as an HDMI switch
230. produce bass frequencies effectively Select SMALLx2 or SMALLx1 to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer If you didn t connect surround back speakers choose NO f you selected HDZONE ZONE 2 or Front Bi Amp in Speaker system setting on page 89 you can t adjust the surround back settings fthe surround speakers are set to NO the surround back speakers will automatically be set to NO e SW LFE signals and bass frequencies of channels set to SMALL are output from the subwoofer when YES is selected Choose the PLUS setting if you want the subwoofer to output bass sound continuously or you want deeper bass the bass frequencies that would normally come out the front and center speakers are also routed to the subwoofer If you did not connect a subwoofer choose NO the bass frequencies are output from other speakers f you have a subwoofer and like lots of bass it may seem logical to select LARGE for your front speakers and PLUS for the subwoofer This may not however yield the best bass results Depending on the speaker placement of your room you may actually experience a decrease in the amount of bass due low frequency cancellations In this case try changing the position or direction of speakers If you can t get good results listen to the bass response with it set to PLUS and YES or the front speakers set to LARGE and SMALL alternatively and let your ears judge which sounds best If you re having problems the ea
231. produced For discs created with standards other than Phase Control the LFE channel is delayed upon recording in the first place Phase Control Plus function corrects for phase shifting on such discs For instructions on setting the Phase Control Plus see Setting the Audio options on page 67 e f your subwoofer has a phase control switch set it to the plus sign or 09 However the effect you can actually feel when PHASE CONTROL is set to ON on this receiver depends on the type of your subwoofer Set your subwoofer to maximize the effect It is also recommended you try changing the orientation or the place of your subwoofer e Set the built in lowpass filter switch of your subwoofer to off If this cannot be done on your subwoofer set the cutoff frequency to a higher value e fthe speaker distance is not properly set you may not have a maximized PHASE CONTROL effect e The PHASE CONTROL mode cannot be set to ON in the following cases When headphones are plugged in When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched on When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Setting the Audio options on page 6T Playback with NETWORK features BV ER CEL CN OI NEN PET 56 Playback with Network fUNCtIONS c ceeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseseaeeeseeesaseessaaeeeseeesnnsssseaeeeeeensnnseagas 57 About network playback dst 60 About playable file TOMMANS vcsisevinnrorssiescemraerinassiemnarnnatsniicem tinimese
232. put eight spaces instead of a name e Once you have named a station preset you can press DISP when listening to a station to switch the display between name and frequency An introduction to RDS for Europe Radio Data System RDS is a system used by most FM radio stations to provide listeners with various kinds of information the name of the station and the kind of show they re broadcasting for example One feature of RDS is that you can search by type of program For example you can search for a station that s broadcasting a show with the program type JAZZ You can search the following program types e n addition there are two other program types TEST and NONE You can t search for these NEWS News AFFAIRS Current Affairs INFO General Information SPORT Sport EDUCATE Educational DRAMA Radio plays etc CULTURE National or regional culture theater etc SCIENCE Science and technology VARIED Usually talk based material such as quiz shows or interviews POP M Pop music ROCK M Rock music EASY M Easy listening LIGHT M Light classical music CLASSICS Serious classical music OTHER M Music not fitting above categories WEATHER Weather reports FINANCE Stock market reports commerce trading etc CHILDREN Programs for children SOCIAL Social affairs RELIGION Programs concerning religion PHONE IN Public expressing their views by phone TRAVEL Holiday type travel rath
233. r on Turn the receiver s power on Wait about 60 seconds after the power turns on for network functions to start The receiver or computer is notcon Connect a LAN cable to the receiver or computer page nected to the LAN uc The router s power is off Turn the router s power on Network connections could be Check the computer s network settings security settings restricted due to the computer s net etc work settings security settings etc In the middle of Wiring Navi you are instructed to turn off the power of the unit and then connect other equipment or speakers This is to avoid failure of the receiver Per the Wiring Navi instructions turn OFF the power due to a short circuit between cables ofthe receiver As long as the browser has not quit or from static electricity Wiring Navi resumes guidance upon turning ON the receiver When the Wiring Navi or This is because of the browser s Interactive Operation Guide security function is launched a waming about security protection appears on the browser This is not a problem Perform the operation to authorize the blocked contents This receiver s IP address has not been entered into the browser cor rectly AV Navigator screen is not displayed on the browser Check the receiver s IP address and enter it correctly in the browser page 92 Receiver settings cannot be JavaScript is disabled on the internet Enable JavaScript made from a browser brow
234. r channels that are not connected Speaker Distance Use this to display the distance from the different channels to the listening position See Speaker Distance on page 90 tor more on this 1 Select Speaker Distance from the MCACC Data Check menu 2 When MCACC is highlighted use to select the MCACC preset you want to check The distance from the various channels set at the selected MCACC preset is displayed is displayed for chan nels that are not connected Standing Wave Use this to display the standing wave related adjustment values for the various MCACC memories See Standing Wave on page 85 for more on this 1 Select Standing Wave from the MCACC Data Check menu 2 When Filter Channel is highlighted use 1 4 to select the channel for which you want to check standing wave control The standing wave related calibration value for the selected channel stored at the selected MCACC preset and its graph are displayed 3 Press to highlight MCACC then use f 4 to select the MCACC preset you want to check Acoustic Cal EQ Use this to display the calibration values for the frequency response of the various channels set in the different MCACC presets See Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust on page 85 for more on this 1 Select Acoustic Cal EQ from the MCACC Data Check menu 2 When Ch is highlighted use f 4 to select the channel The calibration value for the frequency response of t
235. r disturbed Audio files recorded in MPEG 4 AAC or FLAC cannot be played back on Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media Player 12 Try using another server Refer to the operation manual supplied with your server Check whether the component is affected by special cir cumstances or is in the sleep mode Try rebooting the component if necessary Try changing the settings for the component connected to the network Check the folder stored on the component connected to the network Check the computer s network settings security settings etc For more information check with the manufacturer of your server DRM protected audio files cannot be played back on this receiver Cannot access Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media Player 12 If the client is automatically authorized you need to enter the corresponding information again Check whether the connection status is set to Do not authorize Check the audio files stored on the component connected to the network Cannot listen to Internet radio stations This unit cannot be selected from the Spotify application Cause The audio file currently being played back was not recorded in a format playable on this receiver The LAN cable is currently discon nected There is heavy traffic on the network with the Internet being accessed on the same network When in the DMR mode depend ing on the external controller being used playback may be interrupt
236. r preset code stored in the remote However there are cases where only certain functions may be controllable after assigning the proper preset code or the codes for the manufacturer in the remote control will not work for the model that you are using If you can t find a preset code that matches the component you want to control you can still teach the remote individual commands from another remote control see Programming signals from other remote controls on page 77 e With the TV buttons the TV can be operated regardless of the input set for the remote control s operation mode When using one TV set we recommend assigning the same TV s preset codes to the TV INPUT button and the TV button When using two TV sets for better convenience assign the TV connected to the MONITOR OUT terminals to the TV INPUT button the other TV to the TV button e Devices may be assigned to the following input function buttons SOURCE CONTROL E3 C3 E3 C mm Selecting preset codes directly 1 Press and hold RCU SETUP then press 1 for three seconds Release the button after the LED flashes once The LED continues to flash e Tocancel the preset setup mode press RCU SETUP 2 Press the input function button for the component you want to control To assign the preset codes of the TV to be operated with the TV function press the TV INPUT button The LED of the remote control lights 3 Use the number buttons to enter the 4 digit preset code o
237. r the main zone side changes HDZONE cannot be turned on When the input source for the main or HDZONE is switched or when the power of the respective zones is turned on and off the audio or video ofthe HDMI output terminal that is not being operated is sometimes interrupted ing the same input in the main zone and HDZONE video and audio signals that can be output in common for all the devices connected to the HDMI OUT 1 HDMI OUT 2 and HDMI OUT 2 HDZONE terminals are set Set Output Setting at MAIN HDZONE to HDZONE pace 94 This is because the HDMI devices need to recognize each other again This is not a malfunction If the picture is disturbed or not displayed turn off the power of the devices in all the zones then try again Also try temporarily turning the Network Standby and Standby Through settings OFF Such menus as the HOME MENUas Press OUT P and switch the HDMI OUT 1 2 setting well as the on screen display are not displayed for HDMI OUT 1 Change V CONV to ON page 69 Cannot upscale to 4K or 1080p Change RES page 69 When the network function or iPod USB input is selected using HDZONE upscaling cannot be performed To perform upscaling turn off HDZONE or set HDZONE to some other input page 72 4K video is not output even thougha When the MAIN HDZONE setting is MAIN and the HDMI output setting is OUT 1 2 and 4K compliant TV is connected when the MAIN HDZONE setting is HDZONE and HDZONE is the sa
238. ra Vision 0156 Quelle 0140 0141 0149 0152 0155 0229 Questa 0147 Radialva 0155 Radio Shack 0155 Radiola 0149 0152 0155 0229 Radiomarelli 0138 0155 Radiotone 0125 0149 0154 0155 Rank 0147 Recor 0155 Redstar 0155 Reflex 0155 Revox 0125 0149 0152 0155 Rex 0140 0145 0146 RFT 0125 0133 0138 Rhapsody 0228 R Line 0149 0152 0155 Roadstar 0140 0142 0143 0154 Robotron 0138 Rowa 0228 0229 Royal Lux 0125 RTF 0138 Saba 0138 0146 0148 0153 0157 0159 Saisho 0140 0141 0142 0154 0229 Salora 0145 0146 Sambers 0132 0144 Samsung 0119 0120 0125 0140 0141 0142 0149 0150 0152 0154 0155 0177 0178 0181 0204 0208 0228 0229 Sandra 0141 0228 0229 Sansui 0149 0155 Sanyo 0125 0133 0141 0147 0154 0187 0228 0229 SBR 0152 0155 SCHAUB LORENTZ 0146 Schneider 0141 0143 0149 0152 0155 0190 0229 SEG 0140 0141 0144 0147 0152 0154 0155 0190 0228 0229 SEI 0155 SEl Sinudyne 0138 0144 0146 Seleco 0145 0146 0147 Sencora 0142 0154 Sentra 0154 Serino 0228 Sharp 0130 0131 0139 0147 0184 0207 Siarem 0138 0144 0155 Sierra 0149 0155 Siesta 0125 Silva 0228 Silver 0147 Singer 0138 0144 0156 Sinudyne 0138 0144 0152 0155 Skantic 0146 Skyworth 0307 Solavox 0146 Sonitron 0125 0229 Sonoko 0140 0141 0142 0149 0152 0154 0155 0229 Sonolor 0146 0156 Sontec 0125 0149 0152 0155 Sony 0116 0118 0142 0147 0161 0168
239. re deteriorates when this settings is switched ON switch it OFF e When connected to a video device using the component video input set this setting to ON and watch with the HDMI output b When set to a resolution with which the TV monitor is not compatible no picture is output Also in some cases no picture will be output due to copyright protection signals In this case change the setting e When AUTO is selected the resolution is selected automatically according to the capacity of the TV monitor connected by HDMI When PURE is selected the signals are output with the same resolution as when input see About the video converter on page 23 e When 1080 24p or 4K 24p is selected the movement may be unnatural or the picture unclear depending on the video signal being input In this case set the resolution to something other than 1080 24p or 4K 24p e When PURE is selected and the input signal is 480i the on screen display cannot be displayed c P MOTION is disabled when PCINEMA is set to ON e This setting have the effect only for pictures recorded in the interlaced scan format 4801 5761 or 1080i signals d Adjustment is not possible unless V ADJ Advanced Video Adjust is set to MEMORY e This setting is only displayed when the video signals below are being input 480i 576i 480p 576p 720p 1080 analog video signals 480i 576i 480p 576p 720p 1080i 1080p 1080p24 HDMI video signals f This adjustment is only possib
240. re touching any uninsulated SA ND parts e Make sure that all the bare speaker wire is twisted together and inserted fully into the speaker terminal If any of the bare speaker wire touches the back panel it may cause the power to cut off as a safety measure Bare wire connections A CAUTION Make sure that all soeakers are securely installed This not only improves sound quality but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over or falling in the event of external shocks such as e Place the surround speakers at 120 from the center If you 1 use the surround back speaker and 2 don t use the front height speakers front wide speakers we recommend placing the surround speaker right beside 19u n earthquakes e f you intend to connect only one surround back speaker place it directly behind you e Place the left and right front height speakers at least one meter directly above the left and right front speakers 1 Twist exposed wire strands together C22 Loosen terminal and insert exposed wire Some tips for improving sound quality 3 Tighten terminal Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound The following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system 1 2 3 e he subwoofer can be placed on the floor Ideally the other speakers should be at about ear level when you re listening to them Putting the speakers on the floor except t
241. ream Direct with different input signal formats on page 110 While listening to a source press AUTO AUTO SURR ALC STREAM DIRECT to select the mode you want Check the digital format indicators in the front panel display to see how the source is being processed e AUTO SURROUND See Auto playback on page 52 e ALC Listening in Auto level control mode page 52 When ALC is selected the effect level can be adjusted using the EFFECT parameter in Setting the Audio options on page 67 e DIRECT Plays back sound from the source with the least modification next to PURE DIRECT With DIRECT the only modifications added to PURE DIRECT playback are calibration of the sound field by the MCACC sys tem and the Phase Control effect e PURE DIRECT Plays back unmodified sound from source with only minimal digital treatment e Note When listening through headphones you can select ALC or PURE DIRECT mode only Listening to your system Selecting MCACC presets e Default setting MEMORY 1 If you have calibrated your system for different listening positions you can switch between settings to suit the kind of source you re listening to and where you re sitting for example watching movies from a sofa or playing a video game close to the TV 1 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode and then press AUDIO P 2 Use f to select MCACC 3 Use to select the settin
242. ress and hold the input function button corresponding to the command to be erased for three seconds To erase the operations registered at all the TV buttons press the TV INPUT button for 3 seconds If the LED lights for one second the erasing has been successfully completed Using All Zone Standby The All Zone Standby can be used to turn all zones to OFF when the receiver s power is switched to standby Also when using separate Pioneer amplifiers receivers for the sub zones they can also be set to standby simultaneously e n order to set the power of amplifiers receivers connected to sub zones to the standby mode the connected amplifiers receivers must be installed or connected in such a way that they can receive remote control signals e he power of the amplifiers receivers can be switched to standby with this operation even when using multiple Pioneer amplifiers receivers and their Remote Control Mode have been changed 1 Press ALL ZONE STBY The LED continues to flash 2 Press STANDBY ON The receiver s power switches to standby and all zones are turned off Setting the switching time of AV amplifier operation mode e Default setting The AV amplifier operation mode is not switched automatically After pressing SOURCE CONTROL to operate another device you need to press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the mode to AV amplifier operation mode to operate this receiver You can set to automatically switch to AV amplifier operatio
243. rlands Hierbij verklaart Pioneer dat het toestel in overeenstemming is met de essenti le eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999 5 EG Francais Par la pr sente Pioneer d clare que l appareil est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999 5 CE Svenska H rmed intygar Pioneer att denna star verensst mmelse med de v sentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta best mmelser som framg r av direktiv 1999 5 EG Dansk Undertegnede Pioneer erkl rer herved at f lgende udstyr overholder de v sentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999 5 EF Deutsch Hiermit erkl rt Pioneer dass sich dieses in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den anderen relevanten Vorschriften der Richtlinie 1999 5 EG befindet BMWi EAANVIKG ME THN l IAPOY 2A Pioneer AHAONEI OTI 2YMMOP ONETAI lIPO2 TI2 OY IOAEIZ ATIAITHZEIZ KAI TI AOINE2 2XETIKE2 AIATA El2 TH OAHTIA 1999 5 EK Italiano Con la presente Pioneer dichiara che questo conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999 5 CE Espanol Por medio de la presente Pioneer declara que el cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999 5 CE Portugu s Pioneer declara que este esta conforme com os requisitos es
244. rminal so no AC adapter is required Built in Bluetooth Wireless Technology This receiver equipped with B uetooth wireless technology lets you enjoy music files on an iPhone or other bluetooth wireless technology enabled device wirelessly MHL Mobile High definition Link compatible device playback An incorporates MHL 2 mobile device can be connected to enjoy 3D videos full HD videos high quality multi channel audio and photos etc with charge the battery on the receiver HTC Connect HIC Connect makes it easy to wirelessly stream your favorite music straight from your HTC phone There s no need for a separate app HTC Connect is built right in your phone s music player iPod Playback Your iPod and iPhone can be connected to the receiver s USB terminal to play the music files on the iPod or iPhone Also the iPod or iPhone is charged when it is connected to the receiver Playback Processing Multi channel Music File playback This receiver enables multi channel music file playback with a resolution of up to 96 kHz 24 bit Playback of WAV and FLAC files via the front USB port and network is supported DSD File Music playback via Network Front USB and HDMI Playback of high sound quality DSD music DSD files and DSD discs SACDs is supported e High Resolution Music Playback High resolution music files with resolutions of 96 kHz 24 bit to 192 kHz 24 bit can be played Playback of AIFF Apple Lossles
245. rnet radio When INTERNET RADIO is selected the radio station that was playing last time is played e PANDORA Internet radio that supports Pandora e MEDIA SERVER Server components on the network e FAVORITES Favorite songs currently being registered Depending on the selected category the names of folders files and Internet radio stations are displayed Playback with NETWORK features 2 Use f 4 to select the folder music files or Internet radio station to play back and then press ENTER Press to scroll up and down the list and select the desired item When you press ENTER playback starts with the playback screen being displayed for the selected item To return to the list screen press RETURN When the list screen is displayed from the playback screen the playback screen reappears automatically if no operation is performed for three minutes while the list screen is displayed Only audio files with the 43 mark can be played In case of the folders with the C1 mark use f 4 amp and ENTER to select the desired folder and audio files e When I or BPI is pressed at the list screen the page switches e To return to the playback screen from the list display press DISP 3 Repeat step 2 to play back the desired song For detailed operating instructions refer to the section shown below e nternet radio stations See Listening to Internet radio stations on page 57 e Pandora See Listening to Pandora Internet Radio on page
246. rom a transmitter through the air Internet radio stations are accessible from anywhere in the world as long as there is a connection to the Internet as services are not transmitted through the air but are delivered over the World Wide Web On this receiver you can select Internet radio stations by genre as well as by region Depending on the Internet line conditions the sound may not be smooth when playing Internet radio About list of Internet radio The list of Internet radio stations on this receiver is created edited and managed by the vTuner database service exclusively for use with this receiver For details about vTuner see vIuner on page 115 Saving and retrieving Internet radio stations You can easily save and retrieve saved Internet radio stations See Playing back your favorite songs on page 59 for more on this e To listen to Internet radio stations you must have high speed broadband Internet access With a 56 K or ISDN modem you may not enjoy the full benefits of Internet radio e he port number varies depending on the Internet radio station Check the firewall settings A list of Internet radio stations provided by the vTuner database service is subject to change or deletion without notice due to various reasons e Broadcasts may be stopped or interrupted depending on the Internet radio station In this case you cannot listen to a radio station selected from the list of Internet radio stations Registering
247. rs are short circuited Wait at least 1 minute then try turning the power on again The temperature within the unit has exceeded the allowablevalue Lower the volume level HDZONE cannot be turned on Set Output Setting at MAIN HDZONE to HDZONE page 94 No sound Symptom Remedy No sound is output when an input Check the volume mute setting press MUTE and speaker setting press OUT P function is selected No sound is output from the front speakers Make sure the correct input function is selected Check that the MCACC setup microphone is disconnected Make sure the correct input signal is selected see Choosing the input signal on page 54 Note that when Fixed PCM ON is selected you won t be able to hear any other signal format see Setting the Audio options on page 67 Check that the source component is connected properly see Connecting your equipment on page 17 Check that the speakers are connected properly see Connecting the speakers on page 20 Check that the Stereo listening mode or the Front Stage Surround Advance mode isn t selected select one of the surround listening modes see Enjoying various types of play back using the listening modes on page 52 Check that the surround center speakers are not set to NO see Speaker Setting on page 89 Check the channel level settings see Channel Level on page 90 No sound from the surround or center speakers Check the speaker connections
248. s WAV and FLAC files via the front USB port and network is supported Gapless Playback The silent section between tracks is skipped when playing music files eliminating the interruptions that usually occur when playing live or concert contents This receiver plays back AAC or MP3 format files with a minimum gap even though it is fundamentally impossible to play back without a gap Virtual Speakers By turning on the Virtual Surround Back Virtual Height and Virtual Wide modes it is possible to realize a maximum of 11 1 channels combining the speakers that are actually installed and the virtual speakers This makes for a smoother connection between the sounds and an improved 3D feel dts Neo X compatible This receiver supports the latest DIS processing format The quality of Neo X originally designed for 9 channels or more can be enjoyed in a 7 channel environment Dolby Pro Logic llz compatible Adding a pair of speakers above the front left and right speakers adds expressiveness in the vertical direction to the previous horizontally oriented sound field The height channel strengthens the sound field s sense of three dimensionality and air producing presence and expansion Before you start Installation Built in AVNavigator When accessing the receiver from the browser of your smartphone tablet Windows PC or Mac you can use Wiring Navi which explains how to connect or Interactive Operati
249. s the display automatically brightens for a few seconds Turning off the display is effective for suppressing noise from the display that affects sound quality Press DIMMER repeatedly to change the brightness of the front panel display e You can also choose to turn the display off In this case the FL OFF indicator lights Using other functions Phase Control ON Use this procedure to reset all the receiver s settings to the factory default Use the front panel controls to do this iPod USB INTERNET RADIO PANDORA Set MULTI ZONE to MULTI ZONE OFF Australian model only MEDIA SERVER ON Disconnect the iPod and USB memory device from the receiver beforehand Auto Sound Retriever FAVORITES BT AUDIO input function e Set the Control with HDMI to OFF see HDMI Setup on page 63 Resetting the system St MN Other input functions OFF 1 Switch the receiver into standby Sound Delay mis 2 While holding down ENTER on the front panel press STANDBY ON Dual Mono CH1 The display shows RESET lt NO gt DRC AUTO 3 Select RESET using PRESET then press ENTER on the front panel LFE Attenuate OdB The display shows RESET OK Auto delay OFF 4 Press ENTER to confirm Digital Safety OFF OK appears in the display to indicate that the receiver has been reset to the factory default settings Effect Level ALC Auto Level Control 50 e Note that all settings will be saved even if the receiver is unplugged Center Width
250. s Bookmark icon Click Bonjour list a and then select this receiver s name Friendly Name b in Bookmark If Bonjour list is not displayed access the IP address http the receiver s IP address from Safari 3 On the AVNavigator menu screen select Network Setup 4 Click Friendly Name 5 Inputa friendly name then press Apply imis eo Note This setting for the network has been confirmed for Mac OS X 10 7 and Safari 5 1 The System Setup and Other Setup menus a a a o n a eaen Thefirmware upload status screen is displayed Using Safari to update the firmware The upload process finished successfully will be shown when the update is completed 1 Launch Safari on your computer Once updating is completed the receiver s power automatically turns off 2 Press Bookmark icon Click Bonjour list a and then select this receiver s name p Friendly Name b in Bookmark TM If Bonjour list is not displayed access the IP address http the receiver s IP address from Safari CN 3 On the AVNavigator menu screen select Network Setup d 4 Click Firmware Update A Note This setting for the network has been confirmed for Mac OS X 10 7 and Safari 5 1 5 Press Start The firmware update prepare screen is displayed If the screen does not switch automatically click Click here 6 Browse the latest firmware on your computer a and then press
251. s to the other speakers or subwoofer If you didn t connect a center speaker choose NO the center channel is sent to the front speakers e FH Select LARGE if your front height speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively or select SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer If you didn t connect front height speakers choose NO the front height channel is sent to the front speakers You can adjust this setting only when Speaker System setting is Normal SB FH fthe surround speakers are set to NO this setting will automatically be set to NO e FW Select LARGE if your front wide speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively or select SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer If you didn t connect front wide speakers choose NO the front wide channel is sent to the front speakers You can adjust this setting only when Speaker System setting is Normal SB FW lfthe surround speakers are set to NO this setting will automatically be set to NO e Surr Select LARGE if your surround speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively Select SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer If you didn t connect surround speakers choose NO the sound of the surround channels is sent to the front speakers or a subwoofer e SB Select the number of surround back speakers you have one two or none Select LARGEx2 or LARGEx1 if your surround back speakers re
252. s using this receiver but the simplest most direct listening option is the Auto Surround feature The receiver automatically detects what kind of source you re playing and selects multichannel or stereo playback as necessary While listening to a source press AUTO AUTO SURR ALC STREAM DIRECT for auto playback of a source AUTO SURROUND shows briefly in the display before showing the decoding or playback format Check the digi tal format indicators in the front panel display to see how the source is being processed e fthe source is Dolby Digital DIS or Dolby Surround encoded the proper decoding format will automatically be selected and shows in the display e When listening to the BT AUDIO input the SOUND RETRIEVER AIR feature is selected automatically ALC In the Auto level control ALC mode this receiver equalizes playback sound levels Also the low and high frequency sounds dialogs surround effects etc that are difficult to hear when the vol ume is low are adjusted to be optimal for the volume level This mode is particularly optimum when listening at night e Note When ALC is selected the effect level can be adjusted using the EFFECT parameter in Setting the Audio options on page 67 Standard surround sound The following modes provide basic surround sound for stereo and multichannel sources While listening to a source press SURR STANDARD SURROUND If necessary press repeatedly to select a list
253. see Connecting the speakers on page 20 Check that the surround back speakers are set to LARGE or SMALL and the surround speakers are not set to NO see Speaker Setting on page 89 No sound from surround back speakers Check the speaker connections see Connecting the speakers on page 20 If only one surround back speaker is connected make sure it s connected to the left channel speaker terminal Surround back speakers will not play while the Speaker System is set to Speaker B and audio is being played through speaker B When Speaker System is set to Normal SB FH or Normal SB FW and SP FH ON or SP FW ON is selected with the OUT P button no sound will be output from the surround back speakers Select SP SB FH ON SP SB FW ON or SP SB ON see Switching the speaker terminals on page 71 Symptom Remedy Check that the front height or front wide speakers are set to LARGE or SMALL and the surround speakers are not set to NO see Speaker Setting on page 89 No sound from front height or front wide speakers When Speaker System is set to Normal SB FH or Normal SB FW and SP SB ON is selected with the OUT P button no sound will be output from the front height or front wide speakers Select SP SB FH ON SP SB FW ON SP FH ON or SP FW ON see Switching the speaker terminals on page 71 Check the speaker connections see Connecting the speakers on page 20 No sound from subwoofer If your subwoof
254. senciais e outras disposic es da Directiva 1999 5 CE CeStina Pioneer t mto prohla uje Ze tento je ve shod se z kladn mi pozadavky a dal mi p slu n mi ustanoven mi sm rnice 1999 5 ES Eesti K esolevaga kinnitab Pioneer seadme vastavust direktiivi 1999 5 EU pdhinduetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele s tetele Magyar Alul rott Pioneer nyilatkozom hogy a megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet k vetelm nyeknek s az 1999 5 EC ir nyelv egy b eldirasainak Latvie u valoda Ar o Pioneer deklar ka atbilst Direkt vas 1999 5 EK b tiskaj m pras b m un citiem ar to saist tajiem noteikumiem Lietuvi kalba iuo Pioneer deklaruoja kad is atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999 5 EB Direktyvos nuostatas Malti Hawnhekk Pioneer jiddikjara li dan jikkonforma mal ti ijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti o rajn relevanti li hemm fid Dirrettiva 1999 5 EC Sloven ina Pioneer t mto vyhlasuje Ze sp a z kladn po iadavky a v etky pr slu n ustanovenia Smernice 1999 5 ES Sloven ina Pioneer izjavlja da je ta v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi dolo ili direktive 1999 5 ES Rom n Prin prezenta Pioneer declara ca acest este in conformitate cu cerintele esentiale si alte prevederi ale Directivei 1999 5 EU 6bnrapckn C nacronujero Pioneer neknapupa ye TO3M orroB
255. ser The browser is not compatible with JavaScript Use an internet browser that is compatible with JavaScript USB interface Symptom Cause The folders files stored ona The folders files are currently stored USB memory device are not ina region other than the FAT File displayed Allocation Table region The number of levels in a folder is more than 9 The audio files are copyrighted A USB memory device is not recognized The USB memory device does not support the mass storage class specifications A USB hub is currently being used This receiver recognizes the USB memory device as a fraud A USB memory device is connected and displayed but the audio files stored on the USB memory device cannot be played back Some formats of USB memory devices including FAT 12 NTFS and HFS cannot be played back on this receiver The file format cannot be properly played back on this receiver The USB memory cannot be operated with the remote control Over Current shows inthe display Remedy Store the folders files in the FAT region Limit the maximum number of levels in a folder to 9 page 45 Copyrighted audio files stored on a USB memory device cannot be played back page 45 Try using a USB memory device compatible with the mass storage class specifications Note that there are cases where even the audio files stored on a USB memory device compatible with the mass storage class sp
256. ser to a studio environment than ever before Furthermore while it was previously dif ficult to eliminate standing waves this receiver is equipped with a standing wave control function using a unique process to perform acoustic analysis and reduce their influence This section describes how to calibrate the sound field automatically and fine adjust the sound field data manually 1 Press STANDBY ON to switch on the receiver and your TV Make sure that the TV s video input is set to this receiver 2 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode and then press HOME MENU A Graphical User Interface GUI screen appears on your TV Use and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items Press RETURN to exit the current menu e Press HOME MENU at any time to exit the HOME MENU 3 Select Advanced MCACC from the HOME MENU then press ENTER 4 Select the setting you want to adjust e Full Auto MCACC See Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC on page 37 for a quick and effective automatic surround setup e Auto MCACC See Automatic MCACC Expert on page 82 for a more detailed MCACC setup e Manual MCACC Fine tunes your speaker settings and customizes the Acoustic Calibration EQ see Manual MCACC setup on page 84 e Demo No settings are saved and no errors occur When the speakers are connected to this receiver the test tone is output repeatedly Press RETU
257. setting up a separate speaker system in another room read through Speaker system setting on page 89 and make sure to connect your speakers as neces sary before continuing to step 4 EQ Type This determines how the frequency balance is adjusted Normally select SYMMETRY For details see Automatic MCACC Expert on page 82 e MCACC The six MCACC presets are used for storing surround sound settings for different listening posi tions Simply choose an unused preset for now you can rename it later in Data Management on page 87 e Measurement Type When Basic is set the minimum required measurement is performed in a short period of time When Expert is set accurate and precise measurement is performed so it will take some time 4 Press MAIN RECEIVER then select START 5 Follow the instructions on screen Make sure the microphone is connected and if you re using a Subwoofer make sure it is switched on and settoa comfortable volume level 6 Wait for the test tones to finish then confirm the speaker configuration in the GUI screen A progress report is displayed on screen while the receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers present in your setup Try to be as quiet as possible while it s doing this If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the speaker configuration check screen is being displayed the Full Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically In this case you don t need to select OK and press ENTER i
258. siest option is to route all the bass sounds to the subwoofer by selecting SMALL for the front speakers If you select NO for the subwoofer the front speakers will automatically be fixed to LARGE Also the center sur round surround back front height and front wide speakers can t be set to LARGE if the front speakers are set to SMALL In this case all bass frequencies are sent to the subwoofer 3 Select X OVER and set the crossover frequency Frequencies below this point will be sent to the subwoofer or LARGE speakers e his setting decides the cutoff between bass sounds playing back from the speakers selected as LARGE or the subwoofer and bass sounds playing back from those selected as SMALL It also decides where the cutoff will be for bass sounds in the LFE channel With Full Auto MCACC setup or Auto MCACC setup ALL or Speaker Setting the setting here will not apply and the crossover frequency will be automatically set Crossover frequency is a frequency aimed at achieving the optimal sound field taking into account the bass capacity of all connected speakers and human aural characteristics 4 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu The System Setup and Other Setup menus Channel Level Using the channel level settings you can adjust the overall balance of your speaker system an important factor when setting up a home theater system 1 Select Channel Level from the Manual S
259. site before updating 1 Select Software Update from the Other Setup menu 2 Select the update procedure e Update via Internet The receiver checks whether updatable software is available via the Internet Update via USB Memory The receiver checks whether the USB memory device inserted into the USB port on the receiver s front panel contains updatable software Accessing is displayed and the update file is checked Wait a while 3 Checkon the screen whether or not an update file was found If New version found is displayed the update file has been found The version number and updating time are displayed If This is the latest version There is no need to update is displayed no update file has been found 4 Toupdate select OK The updating screen appears and updating is performed e he power turns off automatically once updating is completed Software Update messages Status messages Descriptions Try disconnecting then reconnecting the USB device or storing the update file again If the error still occurs try using a different USB memory device FILE ERROR No update file was found on the USB memory device Store the file in the USB memory device s root directory UPDATE ERROR 1 to UPDATE ERROR 7 Turn the receiver s power off then turn it back on and try updating the software again If this message flashes updating has failed Update via a USB memory device Put the update file on a USB memor
260. sound setup which includes the advanced fea tures of Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ Auto Phase Control Plus For discs created with standards other than Phase Control the LFE channel is delayed upon recording in the first place This function automatically corrects phase shifting on such discs and broadcasts This function is particu larly effective when playing multi channel music containing low frequency effects LFE Phase Control Phase Control effectively eliminates phase lag which makes the sound lack synchronization and significantly improves the multi channel sound without any extra operation PQLS Bit stream Jitterless high quality playback is possible by connecting a PQLS compatible player with HDMI connections This feature is only available when the connected Pioneer Blu ray Disc Player supports the PQLS function Video Ultra HD with 4K 60p video support Pass through and upscaling Up to 4K 60p resolution images can be passed through and displayed as such and the HD High Definition or Full HD images of DVDs Blu ray discs and HD broadcasts can be upscaled to a resolution of up to 4K 60p and displayed A separate monitor supporting Ultra HD 4K video is required HDMI 4K60p 3D Audio Return Channel 1 in 2 out As for 2 out You can select Dual out or HDZONE out A compatible component is required to use the above function Network Spotify Digital Music Streaming Service re
261. speakers etc Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the speakers are properly connected If Reverse Phase is displayed the speaker s wiring and may be inverted Check the speaker connections fthe connections were wrong turn off the power disconnect the power cord then reconnect properly After this perform the Auto MCACC procedure again fthe connections were right select GO NEXT and continue The Advanced MCACC menu 8 Make sure OK is selected then press ENTER A progress report is displayed on screen while the receiver outputs more test tones to determine the optimum receiver settings Again try to be as quiet as possible while this is happening It may take 3 to 7 minutes e f you selected a STAND WAVE Multi Point setup in step 2 you will be asked to place the mic at the 2nd and 3rd reference points before finally placing it at your main listening position 9 The Auto MCACC Setup procedure is completed and the Advanced MCACC menu reappears automatically The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup should give you excellent surround sound from your system but itis also possible to adjust these settings manually using the Manual MCACC setup menu starting below or Manual SP Setup menu starting on page 89 e Depending on the characteristics of your room sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm 5 inches will end up with different size settings You can correct the setting manu
262. speakers see Con necting the speakers on page 20 The Phase Control feature doesn t seem to have an audible effect If applicable check that the lowpass filter switch on your subwoofer is off or the lowpass cutoff is set to the highest frequency setting If there is a PHASE setting on your sub woofer set it to 0 or depending on the subwoofer the setting where you think it has the best overall effect on the sound Make sure the speaker distance setting is correct for all speakers see Speaker Distance on page 90 Check that personal computers or other digital components connected to the same power source are not causing interference Noise or hum can be heard even when there is no sound being input Can t select some Input functions by the INPUT SELECTOR on the front panel or the ALL button on the remote control Check the Input Skip settings in the Input Setup menu see he Input Setup menu on page 39 Check the HDMI Input assignment in the Input Setup menu then try OFF see he Input Setup menu on page 39 There seems to be a time lag See Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC on page 37 between the speakers and the output to set up your system again using MCACC this will automatically compensate for a delay of the subwoofer in the subwoofer output The maximum volume available shown in the front panel display is lower than the 12dB maximum Check that the Vo
263. ss Favorite The selected song or Internet radio station is then registered in the Favorite A Note To delete tracks or Internet radio stations that have been registered set the input to FAVORITES select the track or station to be deleted then press the CLR button Playback with NETWORK features About network playback The network playback function of this unit uses the following technologies Windows Media Player See Windows Media Player 11 Windows Media Player 12 on page 115 for more on this DLNA C CERTIFIED DLNA CERTIFIED Audio Player The Digital Living Network Alliance DLNA is a cross industry organization of consumer electronics comput ing industry and mobile device companies Digital Living provides consumers with easy sharing of digital media through a wired or wireless network in the home The DLNA certification logo makes it easy to find products that comply with the DLNA Interoperability Guidelines This unit complies with DLNA Interoperability Guidelines v1 5 When a PC running DLNA server software or other DLNA compatible device is connected to this player some setting changes of software or other devices may be required Please refer to the operating instructions for the software or device for more information DLNA M the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks service marks or certification marks of the Digital Living Network Alliance Content playable over a network e Eve
264. st tones A progress report is displayed on screen while the receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers present in your setup Try to be as quiet as possible while it s doing this e With error messages such as Too much ambient noise or Check microphone select RETRY after check ing for ambient noise see Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 38 and verifying the mic connection If there doesn t seem to be a problem you can simply select GO NEXT and continue e Do not adjust the volume during the test tones This may result in incorrect speaker settings 7 If necessary confirm the speaker configuration in the GUI screen The configuration shown on screen should reflect the actual speakers you have If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the speaker configuration check screen is being displayed the Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically In this case you don t need to select OK and press ENTER in step 8 e f you see an ERR message or the speaker configuration displayed isn t correct there may be a problem with the speaker connection If selecting RETRY doesn t work turn off the power and check the speaker con nections If there doesn t seem to be a problem you can simply use to select the speaker and to change the setting and continue If the speaker is not pointed to the microphone listening position or when using speakers that affect the phase dipole speakers reflective
265. stem Setup menu on page 39 to change the assignments if other connections are used Input Terminals CAUTION Input function Before making or changing the connections switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from the power outlet Plugging in should be the final step e When making connections also keep the power cords of the devices being connected unplugged from the DVD IN 1 COAX 1 IN 1 power outlets Component BD BD SAT CBL IN 2 e Depending on the device being connected amplifier receiver etc the methods of connection and terminal names may differ from the explanations in this manual Also refer to the operating instructions of the respec TV OPT 1 tive devices HDMI 3 IN 3 nR RA R HDMI 4 IN 4 Rear panel E IN 5 front panel HDMI T 2 ING ING MHL LAN 10 100 DC OUTPUT HDMI 6 MHL IN 6 sua wu uu uu uu uu uu Fa OSAMA SAMAD CD ANALOG 1 ASSIGNABLE COAXIAL IN E DVD ASSIGNABLE n BEIM CENTER pitis alls oe I cae FRONT HEIGHT WIDE E L 66060000090 000000090 OG SPEAKERS Connecting your equipment Determining the speakers application B 7 2 channel surround system Front wide This unit permits you to build various surround systems in accordance with the number of speakers you have Speaker System setting Normal SB FW e De sure to co
266. supply Press NET to set the remote control to the network function control mode Switch on the built in DHCP server function of your router or set up the network manually according to your network environment page 91 The automatic configuration process takes time Please wait Cause Symptom The audio files stored on components on the net work such as a PC cannot be played back Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media Player 12 is not cur rently installed on your PC Audio files recorded in MPEG 4 AAC or FLAC are being played back on Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media Player 12 The component connected to the network is not properly operated The component connected to the network does not permit file sharing The folder stored on the component connected to the network has been deleted or damaged Network connections could be restricted due to the computer s net work settings security settings etc Supported file formats vary by server As Such files not supported by your server are not displayed on this unit The audio files are copyrighted Cannot access the com ponent connected to the network The component connected to the network is not properly set There are no playable audio files on the component connected to the network Remedy Symptom Install Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media Player 12 on your PC page 56 Audio playback is undesir ably stopped o
267. t use the surround speakers for the surround channel not the surround back channel Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone If Reverse Phase is displayed try the following The speaker s wiring and may be inverted Check the speaker connections Depending on the type of speakers and their installation conditions Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the speakers are properly connected If this happens select GO NEXT and continue f the speaker is not pointed to the microphone listening position or when using speakers that affect the phase dipole speakers reflective speakers etc it may not be possible to properly identify the polarity There may have been some low frequency noise in the room from an air conditioner motor etc Switch off all other appliances in the room and use Auto MCACC Setup again Depending on a number of factors bass reproduction capabilities of the speakers room size speaker placement etc this may occur in some cases Change the speaker setting manually in Speaker Setting on page 89 and use the ALL Keep SP System option for the Auto MCACC menu in Automatic MCACC Expert on page 82 if this is a recurring problem Check that the speakers are all in phase make sure the positive and negative terminals are matched up properly With the receiver in standby press STANDBY ON for about 5 seconds while holding down SPEAKER
268. t MCACC presets e For some of the settings below you ll have to connect the setup microphone to the front panel and place it about ear level at your normal listening position Press HOME MENU to display the HOME MENU before you connect the microphone to this receiver e See Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 38 for notes regarding high background noise levels and other possible interference e f you re using a subwoofer switch it on and turn up the volume to the middle position 1 Select Manual MCACC from the Advanced MCACC menu see Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC menu on page 82 if you re not already at this screen 2 Select the setting you want to adjust If you re doing this for the first time you might want to make these settings in order Fine Channel Level Make fine adjustments to the overall balance of your speaker system see Fine Channel Level on page 84 e Fine SP Distance Make precise delay settings for your speaker system see Fine Speaker Distance on page 84 Standing Wave Control overly resonant low frequencies in your listening room see Standing Wave on page 85 The last two settings are specifically for customizing the parameters explained in Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust on page 85 EQ Adjust Manually adjust the frequency balance of your speaker system while listening to test tones see Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust on page 85 e EQ Professional Calibra
269. tal to analog conversion when you use the HDMI interface This is valid as an HDMI function for POLS compatible players e OFF PQLS is disabled 8 Select the Standby Through setting you want It is possible to transfer signals from an HDMI connected player to the TV when this receiver s power is on standby Select the HDMI input whose HDMI signal is to be input for through transfer when in the standby mode When LAST is selected the signal being input to the currently selected HDMI input is transferred When OFF is selected no HDMI input is transferred through when in the standby mode However when Control is set to ON the HDMI signal is transferred through by the Control with HDMI function even when in the standby mode e When anything other than OFF is set for this setting the receiver s HDMI input can be switched even when the receiver is in the standby mode Switch by pointing the remote control at the receiver and pressing the HDMI BD DVD or SAT CBL button e Setting to anything other than OFF increases power consumption in the standby mode e This setting can be used even with devices that are not compatible with the Control with HDMI function e The Standby Through function cannot be used with MHL compatible devices 9 When you re finished press HOME MENU Control with HDMI function Before using synchronization Once you have finished all connections and settings you must 1 Putall components into sta
270. tc and if your neighbor s micro wave is placed near your system you may experience radio wave interference If this occurs move your unit to a different place When the microwave is not in use there will be no radio wave interference Basic playback Radio wave reflections The radio waves received by this unit include the radio wave coming directly from the device equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology direct wave and waves coming from various directions due to reflections by walls furniture and building reflected waves The reflected waves due to obstacles and reflecting objects further produce a variety of reflected waves as well as variation in reception condition depending on locations If the audio cannot be received properly due to this phenomenon try moving the location of the device equipped with bluetooth wireless technology a little Also note that audio may be interrupted due to the reflected waves when a person crosses or approaches the space between this unit and the device equipped with B uetooth wireless technology Precautions regarding connections to products supported by this unit e Complete connections for all devices supported by this unit including all audio cords and power cables before connecting them to this unit e After completing connections to this unit check the audio and power cables to confirm that they not twisted together e When disconnecting this unit confirm that you have sufficient
271. tch to the MHL input when an MHL compatible device is connected see MHL Setup on page 92 e The MHL compatible device is recharged whenever it is connected to this unit Recharging is enabled only when the unit s power is turned on e For instructions on playing the MHL compatible device see Playing an MHL compatible device on page 46 Do not place the MHL device on this unit which has the power turned on Wireless LAN converter AS WL300 Connecting an HDMI equipped component to the front panel input HDMI 5 INPUT Video camera etc Connecting your equipment Connecting an IR receiver Plugging in the receiver If you keep your stereo components in a closed cabinet or shelving unit or you wish to use the sub zone remote Only plug in after you have connected all your components to this receiver including the speakers control in another zone you can use an optional IR receiver Such as a Niles or Xantech unit to control your system instead of the remote sensor on the front panel of this receiver A CAUTION e Remote operation may not be possible if direct light from a strong fluorescent lamp is shining on the IR receiver remote sensor window e Note that other manufacturers may not use the IR terminology Refer to the manual that came with your com ponent to check for IR compatibility e f using two remote controls at the same time the IR receiv
272. te your system based on the direct sound coming from the speakers and make detailed settings according to your room s reverb characteristics see Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional on page 85 Fine Channel Level e Default setting 0 0dB all channels You can achieve better surround sound by properly adjusting the overall balance of your speaker system You can adjust the Channel Level of each speaker in 0 5 dB increments The following setting can help you make detailed adjustments that you may not achieve using the Manual speaker setup on page 89 1 Select Fine Channel Level from the Manual MCACC setup menu The volume increases to the 0 0 dB reference level 2 Adjust the level of the left channel This will be the reference speaker level so you may want to keep the level around 0 0dB so that you ll have plenty of room to adjust the other speaker levels e After pressing ENTER test tones will be output 3 Select each channel in turn and adjust the levels 12 0 dB as necessary Use to adjust the volume of the speaker you selected to match the reference speaker When it sounds like both tones are the same volume press to confirm and continue to the next channel e For comparison purposes the reference speaker will change depending on which speaker you select e f you want to go back and adjust a channel simply use ft 4 to select it 4 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Manual MCACC setu
273. ted audio files cannot be played back on this receiver e DRM protected audio files cannot be played back on this receiver e On the playback screen pressing RETURN displays a list screen To return to the playback screen press DISP Basic playback controls This receiver s remote control buttons can be used for basic playback of files stored on USB memory devices e Press iPod USB to switch the remote control to the iPod USB operation mode DISP B B B A Note While a DSD file is being played lt lt and gt gt are disabled Playing back photo files stored on a USB memory device e Photo files cannot be played in the sub zone 1 Use f to select a folder then press ENTER to browse that folder e For high resolution files some time may be required for the photo to appear e o return to the previous level any time press RETURN 2 Continue browsing until you arrive at what you want to play then press ENTER to start playback The selected content is displayed in full screen and a slideshow starts Basic playback controls Button s What it does ENTER gt Starts displaying a photo and playing a slideshow E Stops the player and returns to the previous menu Tip e Slideshows of photo files can be played while listening to music files by returning to the folder file list display while playing a music file on a USB device then playing the photo files o play back a music file while viewing a slide show sel
274. tends to lead to high packet communication charges so we recommend subscribing to a fixed packet rate plan For details contact your mobile telephone operator Preparations 2 Connecting this unit to the network e Connect this unit to the network and also to the Internet page 32 e Connect the mobile digital device by Wi Fi to the wireless LAN router of the same network as the one to which this unit is connected For instructions on connecting see the operating instructions of the mobile digital device and the wireless LAN router Playback with NETWORK features In order to use the Spotify audio stream playback function from the Spotify application To use the Spotify audio stream playback function select this unit on the Spotify application When Spotify audio streaming starts this unit s input automatically switches to Spotity A CAUTION Even if you are away from home if you start Spotify audio streaming to play music on your mobile digital device and this unit is selected the sound will be output from this unit Depending on the volume level the output may be loud so be sure to check the audio output selection carefully before starting audio streaming In addition if you accidentally select this unit and play the sound on it switch the audio output selection to the mobile digital device ee Notes e A separate contract with payment to an Internet service provider is required to use the Spotify audio stream playback fun
275. ter selecting ALL or Keep SP System the reverberation characteristics after calibration cannot be predicted so the graph for the characteristics after calibration After cannot be displayed If you will need to display the graph for the characteristics after calibration After take the measurement using the EQ Professional menu in the Manual MCACC setup page 84 The EQ Pro amp S Wave measurement is also taken when ALL or Keep SP System is selected See Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional on page 85 for more on this Either effect of Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional and Standing Wave can be switched on and off in the respective MCACC preset For details see Setting the Audio options on page 67 EQ Type only available when the Auto MCACC Menu above is EQ Pro amp S Wave This determines how the frequency balance is adjusted After a single calibration is performed each of the following three correction curves can be stored separately in the MCACC memory SYMMETRY implements symmetric correction for each pair of left and right speakers to flatten the frequency amplitude characteristics ALL CH ADJ isa flat setting where all the speakers are set individually so no special weighting is given to any one channel FRONT ALIGN sets all speakers in accordance with the front speaker settings no equalization is applied to the front left and right channels If you selected ALL or Keep SP System as your Auto
276. th these buttons regardless of the input set for the remote control s operation mode page 6 6 Receiver Control buttons e STATUS Displays the IP address and information such as selected set functions and input signals on the display page 73 e OUT P OUTPUT PARAMETER Switches the output terminal of the HDMI signal or speaker terminal to be played page 71 e RETURN Press to confirm and exit the current menu screen e CH LV CHANNEL LEVEL Press repeatedly to select a channel then use to adjust the level pages 11 and 90 7 Receiver setting buttons Press MAIN RECEIVER first to access e AUDIO P AUDIO PARAMETER Use to access the Audio options page 67 e VIDEO P VIDEO PARAMETER Use to access the Video options page 69 e HOME MENU Use to access the Home Menu pages 39 40 63 82 and 89 8 T1 L4 ENTER Use the arrow buttons when setting up your surround sound system see page 82 and the Audio or Video options page 67 or 69 9 LISTENING MODE buttons e AUTO AUTO SURROUND ALC STREAM DIRECT Switches between Auto Surround page 52 Auto Level Control mode and Stream Direct mode page 53 e SURR STANDARD SURROUND Press for Standard decoding and to switch various modes 00 Pro Logic Neo X etc page 52 e ADV ADVANCED SURROUND Use to switch between the various surround modes page 53 10 Source device operation button Operates other devices or each input TUNER etc
277. that can be converted from the component video input for the HDMI output are 4801 5761 480p 576p 720p and 10801 1080p signals cannot be converted This item incorporates copy protection technology that is protected by U S patents and other intellectual property rights of Rovi Corporation Reverse engineering and disassembly are prohibited About HDMI The HDMI connection transfers uncompressed digital video as well as almost every kind of digital audio This receiver incorporates High Definition Multimedia Interface HDMI technology This receiver supports the functions described below through HDMI connections e Digital transfer of uncompressed video contents protected by HDCP 1080p 24 1080p 60 etc e 3D signal transfer e Deep Color signal transfer e x v Color signal transfer e ARC Audio Return Channel e 4K signal transfer This may not operate properly depending on the connected equipment AK 24p 4K 25p 4K 30p 4K 50p and 4K 60p signals are supported e Input of multi channel linear PCM digital audio signals 192 kHz or less for up to 8 channels e nput of the following digital audio formats Dolby Digital Dolby Digital Plus DTS High bitrate audio Dolby TrueHD DTS HD Master Audio DTS HD High Resolution Audio CD SACD DSD signal e Synchronized operation with components using the Control with HDMI function see Control with HDMI func tion on page 62 2 Notes e An HDMI connection can onl
278. the C GAIN effect see Setting the Audio options on page 67 e When listening through headphones you can select STEREO mode only Using the Advanced surround effects The Advanced surround effects can be used for a variety of additional Surround sound effects Most Advanced Surround modes are designed to be used with film soundtracks but some modes are also suited for music sources Try different settings with various soundtracks to see which you like Press ADV ADVANCED SURROUND repeatedly to select a listening mode ACTION Designed for action movies with dynamic soundtracks DRAMA Designed for movies with lots of dialog e ADVANCED GAME Suitable for video games e SPORTS Suitable for sports programs CLASSICAL Gives a large concert hall type sound e ROCK POP Creates a live concert sound for rock and or pop music EXT STEREO Gives multichannel sound to a stereo source using all of your speakers e F S SURROUND Use to provide a rich surround sound effect directed to the center of where the front left and right speakers sound projection area converges Front left speaker Front right speaker e SOUND RETRIEVER AIR Suitable for listening to the sound from a B uetooth wireless technology device The SOUND RETRIEVER AIR listening mode can only be selected when the BT AUDIO input e PHONES SURR When listening through headphones you can still get the effect of overall surround e ECO MODE 1 Select th
279. the TV is connected with anything other than an HDMI cable watch the front panel display while performing the various operations and making settings amp Important e Many of the settings and functions cannot be selected when the Operation Mode is changed to Basic 1 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode and then press HOME MENU A Graphical User Interface GUI screen appears on your TV Use f 4 and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items Press RETURN to exit the current menu 2 Select Operation Mode Setup from the HOME MENU 3 Select the Operation Mode setting you want e Expert default Users can set all the functions by themselves e Basic Only certain basic settings can be operated The settings that can be operated are shown below They can be set as necessary by referring to the operating instructions Operable settings items Descriptions HOME MENU Full Auto MCACC Makes high precision sound field settings easily at Input Name Input names can be changed as desired for easier use 39 Input Skip Inputs not being used are skipped not displayed 39 Software Update Updates to the latest version of the software 93 Network Information Checks the receiver s IP address 92 Audio Parameters MCACC MCACC preset Selects your favorite MCACC preset memory 67 DELAY Adj h lay ti fth I i 1 Sound Delay djusts the delay time of the overall soun
280. this CD ROM and is not responsible for any compensation The names of private corporations products and other entities described herein are the registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective firms Installing the receiver e When installing this unit make sure to put it on a level and stable surface e Don t install it on the following places on a color TV the screen may distort near a cassette deck or close to a device that gives off a magnetic field This may interfere with the sound in direct sunlight in damp or wet areas in extremely hot or cold areas in places where there is vibration or other movement in places that are very dusty jin places that have hot fumes or oils such as a kitchen e Do not touch this receiver s bottom panel while the power is on or just after it is turned off The bottom panel becomes hot when the power is on or right after it is turned off and could cause burns Loading the batteries The batteries included with the unit are to check initial operations they may not last over a long period We rec ommend using alkaline batteries that have a longer life 1 A WARNING e Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or other excessively hot place such as inside a car or near a heater This can cause batteries to leak overheat explode or catch fire It can also reduce the life or perfor mance of batteries A CAUTION Incorrect us
281. ticularly optimum when listening at night Front Stage Surround Advance With the Front Stage Surround Advance feature you can enjoy seamless natural surround sound effects using only the front speakers without deteriorating the quality of the original sound MCACC The Auto MCACC Setup provides a quick but accurate surround sound setup which includes the advanced fea tures of Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ Control with HDMI function Synchronized operations below with a Control with HDMI compatible Pioneer TV or Blu ray Disc player are pos sible when the component is connected to the receiver using an HDMI cable e The receiver s volume can be set and the sound can be muted using the TV s remote control e The receiver s input switches over automatically when the TV s input is changed or a Control with HDMI compatible component is played e The receiver s power is also set to standby when the TV s power is set to standby ARC Audio Return Channel When a IV supporting the HDMI ARC Audio Return Channel function is connected to the receiver the sound of the TV can be input via the HDMI OUT terminal The sound of the TV can be input from the receiver s HDMI OUT terminal so connection with the TV can be com pleted with a single HDMI cable Network function AirPlay AirPlay works with iPhone iPad and iPod touch with iOS 4 3 3 or later Mac with OS X Mountain Lion and Mac and PC with iTunes 10 2 2 or later
282. tings DVD player etc Select one DIGITAL OUT AUDIO OUT OPTICAL COAXIAL R ANALOG L E o VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT HDMI OUT ae HDMI ASSIGNABLE J a Connecting your equipment SS e f your set top box is equipped with an HDMI output terminal we recommend connecting it to the receiver s ian Connecting a satellite cable receiver or other set top box HDMI SAT CBL IN terminal When doing so also connect the receiver and TV by HDMI see Connecting using faa Satellite and cable receivers and terrestrial digital TV tuners are all examples of so called set top boxes HDMI on page 24 When you set up the receiver you ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the set top box to see he HDMI DVI compatible monitor Input Setup menu on page 39 HDMI IN Select one AUDIO OUT DIGITAL OUT R ANALOG L OPTICAL COAXIAL SAT CBL e Even if your set top box is equipped with an HDMI output terminal in some cases the sound is output from the digital audio output optical or coaxial and only the video is output from the HDMI output terminal In this case make the HDMI and digital audio connections as shown below DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL COAXIAL HDMI OUT CAL y UU SS OPTI e Dr iva IN E ao ASSIGNABLE 010 a e HDMI r
283. to music sources e Neo X GAME Up to 7 1 channel sound surround back front height or front wide especially suited to video games e STEREO he audio is heard with your sound settings and you can still use the audio options With multichannel sources If you have connected surround back front height or front wide speakers you can select according to format e X Pro Logic IIx MOVIE See above e X Pro Logic IIx MUSIC See above e Dolby Digital EX Creates surround back channel sound for 5 1 channel sources and provides pure decoding for 6 1 channel sources like Dolby Digital Surround EX e DTS ES Matrix or DTS ES Discrete Allows you to hear 6 1 channel playback with DTS ES encoded sources e Neo X CINEMA See above e Neo X MUSIC See above e Neo X GAME See above I Pro Logic llz HEIGHT See above e WIDE SURROUND MOVIE See above e WIDE SURROUND MUSIC See above e STEREO See above e Straight Decode Plays back without the effects above e Notes e When listening sources in Pro Logic llz HEIGHT mode you can also adjust the H GAIN effect see Setting the Audio options on page 67 e When listening to 2 channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic Ilx Music mode there are three further parameters you can adjust C WIDTH DIMENSION and PANORAMA See Setting the Audio options on page 6 to adjust them e When listening to 2 channel sources in Neo X Cinema Neo X Music or Neo X Game mode you can also adjust
284. tored in seven banks or classes A to G of 9 stations each 1 Tune to a station you want to memorize See Listening to the radio on page 47 for more on this 2 Press TOOLS TUNER EDIT The display shows PRESET MEMORY then a blinking memory class 3 Press CLASS to select one of the seven classes then press PRESET to select the station preset you want You can also use the number buttons to select a station preset 4 Press ENTER After pressing ENTER the preset class and number stop blinking and the receiver stores the station Listening to station presets 1 Press TUNER to select the tuner 2 Press CLASS to select the class in which the station is stored Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A to G 3 Press PRESET to select the station preset you want e You can also use the number buttons on the remote control to recall the station preset Naming station presets For easier identification you can name your station presets 1 Choose the station preset you want to name See Listening to station presets on page 47 for how to do this 2 Press TOOLS TUNER EDIT The display shows PRESET NAME then a blinking cursor at the first character position 3 input the name you want Use B or TUNE B of front panel to select a character or PRESET of front panel to set the position and ENTER to confirm your selection A Notes e To erase a station name simply repeat steps 1 to 3 and in
285. ual for your Bluetooth capable device for more details 1 Press STANDBY ON and turn the power to the unit on 2 Press BT ADPT The unit switches to BT AUDIO and WAITING DEVICE will be displayed on the front panel of the unit 3 Turnon the power to the Bluetooth capable device that you wish to pair with and perform pairing procedure on it Pairing will start e Place the B uetooth capable device close to the unit Please refer to the user s manual for your B uetooth capable device for details on when pairing can be per formed and the procedures required for pairing e When PIN code entry is requested enter 0000 This unit does not accept any PIN code setting other than 0000 4 Confirm on the Bluetooth capable device that pairing has been completed If pairing with the B uetooth capable device has been completed correctly CONNECTED will be displayed on the front panel of the unit Basic playback Listen to music on the unit from a Bluetooth capable device 1 Press BT ADPT The unit will switch to BT AUDIO input 2 A Bluetooth connection will be created between the Bluetooth capable device and the unit Procedures for connecting to the unit should be performed from the b uetooth capable device e Please refer to the user s manual for your B uetooth capable device for details of the connection procedures e The unit is automatically connected with the B uetooth capable device that it was last connected to To con nect to a diff
286. unlight or strong artificial light D3 4 2 1 7c A2 En CAUTION The STANDBY ON switch on this unit will not completely shut off all power from the AC outlet Since the power cord serves as the main disconnect device for the unit you will need to unplug it from the AC outlet to shut down all power Therefore make sure the unit has been installed so that the power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC outlet in case of an accident To avoid fire hazard the power cord should also be unplugged from the AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time for example when on vacation D3 4 2 2 2a A1 En This product is for general household purposes Any failure due to use for other than household purposes such as long term use for business purposes in a restaurant or use in a car or ship and which requires repair will be charged for even during the warranty period K041 A1 En WARNING Store small parts out of the reach of children and infants If accidentally swallowed contact a doctor immediately D41 6 4 A1 En Information for users on collection and disposal of old equipment and used batteries S ymbol for equipment us e for batteries Radio wave caution These symbols on the products packaging and or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste For proper treatment recovery and recycling of ol
287. ure again fthe connections were right select GO NEXT and continue 7 Make sure OK is selected then press ENTER A progress report is displayed on screen while the receiver outputs more test tones to determine the optimum receiver settings Again try to be as quiet as possible while this is happening It may take 3 to 10 minutes Basic Setup 8 The Full Auto MCACC Setup procedure is completed and the Home Menu menu reappears automatically Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this receiver upon completion of the Full Auto MCACC Setup The settings made in the Full Auto MCACC Setup should give you excellent surround sound from your system but itis also possible to adjust these settings manually using Ihe Advanced MCACC menu on page 81 or The System Setup and Other Setup menus on page 88 e Depending on the characteristics of your room sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm 5 inches will end up with different size settings You can correct the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup on page 89 e The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position This set ting should be accurate taking delay and room characteristics into account and generally does not need to be changed e f Full Auto MCACC Setup measurement results are incorrect due to the interaction of the speakers and view ing environment we recommend adjusting the settings manuall
288. ver may be cleared However settings made when the power was turned off normally are not cleared Power Symptom Remedy The power does not turn on Make sure that the power cord is plugged in to an active power outlet Try disconnecting from the power outlet then plugging back in Power cannot be turned off ZONE 2 ON is displayed Power cannot be turned off HDZONE ON is displayed The receiver suddenly switches off or the iPod iPhone indicator blinks Press the ZONE 2 button on the remote control for 1 5 seconds and then press the STANDBY ON button to turn OFF the power Press the HDZONE button on the remote control for 1 5 seconds and then press the STANDBY ON button to turn OFF the power Check that there are no loose strands of speaker wire touching the rear panel or another set of wires If so re attach the speaker wires making sure there are no stray strands The receiver may have a serious problem Disconnect from the power and call a Pioneer authorized independent service company During loud playback the power sud Turn down the volume denly switches off Lower the 63 Hz and 125 Hz equalizer levels in the Manual MCACC setup on page 84 Switch on the digital safety feature While holding down ENTER on the front panel press STANDBY ON to set this receiver to the standby mode Use TUNE f 4 to select D SAFETY OFF and then use PRESET to select 1 or 2 select D SAFETY OFF to deactiv
289. ver using the same type of video cable as you used to connect your main zone main zone as well To output multi channel audio sources set HDZONE to OFF or change video component For the component video input however signals are only output from the HDZONE input the HDMI output so when using the component video input set V CONV to ON Make sure the input assignment is correct for components connected using component video or HDMI cables see The Input Setup menu on page 39 BT AUDIO terminal Check the video output settings of the source component Check that the video input you selected on your TV is correct Symptom Hea Some components such as video game units have resolutions that may not be con The Bluetooth wireless technology Check that no object that emits electromagnetic waves in the 2 4 GHz band microwave verted If adjusting this receiver s Resolution setting in Setting the Video options on device cannot be connected or oper oven wireless LAN device or Bluetooth wireless technology apparatus is near the unit If page 69 and or the resolution settings on your component or display doesn t work try ated Sound from the B uetooth wire such an object is near the unit set the unit far from it Or stop using the object emitting switching V CONV in Setting the Video options on page 69 to OFF s nes ie OLANIN SUI SOU OS NN elec OMisg ere Wace When the HDMI OUT 1 2 setting of the output parameter function is s
290. verntabenastussvenndecuirarsncavssateunceasinasuene EVEN NE 74 Using other functions Setting the Audio options There are a number of additional sound settings you can make using the AUDIO PARAMETER menu The defaults if not stated are listed in bold amp Important e Note that if a setting doesn t appear in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu it is unavailable due to the current source settings and status of the receiver 1 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode and then press AUDIO P 2 Use f to select the setting you want to adjust Depending on the current status mode of the receiver certain options may not be able to be selected Check the table below for notes on this 3 Use to set as necessary See the table below for the options available for each setting 4 Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu Audio parameter menu Setting MCACC MCACC preset EQ Acoustic Calibration EQ S WAVE Standing Wave PHASE Phase Control Phase C Phase Control Plus DELAY Sound Delay TONE Tone Control BASS lt a gt TREBLE lt a gt What it does Selects your favorite MCACC preset memory when multiple preset memories are saved When an MCACC preset memory has been renamed the given name is displayed Switches on off the effects of EQ Pro Switches on off the effects of Standing Wave Control Switches on off the effects of Phas
291. widely used but is sometimes necessary when two languages need to be sent to separate channels Use to switch the input signal type analog digital HDMI page 54 This is useful if you find there is a slight delay before OFF recognizes the PCM signal on a CD for instance When ON is selected noise may be output during playback of non PCM sources Please select another input signal if this is a problem Adjusts the level of dynamic range for movie soundtracks optimized for Dolby Digital DTS Dolby Digital Plus Dolby TrueHD DTS HD and DTS HD Master Audio you may need to use this feature when listen ing to surround sound at low volumes This is a setting of the post process function of the Dolby TrueHD decoder By setting to OFF you can enjoy higher sound quality This can only be set when DRC is set to OFF and the input signal is a Dolby TrueHD signal Option s ON OFF OFF FLAT UP1 UP2 UP3 UP4 gt Default OFF ON OFF AUTO OFF CH1 Channel 1 is heard only CH2 Channel 2 is heard only CH1 CH2 Both chan nels heard from front speakers AUTO ANALOG DIGITAL lt d gt HDMI OFF ON AUTO MAX MID OFF ON OFF Setting LFE LFE Attenuate INPUT ATT Input attenuate lt f gt HDMI HDMI Audio lt g gt A DELAY Auto delay lt h gt C WIDTH Center Width Applicable only when using a center speaker lt j gt DIMENSION lt j
292. woofer It is not possible to connect using speaker cables e f you have two subwoofers the second subwoofer can be connected to the SUBWOOFER 2 terminal Connecting two subwoofers increases the bass sound to achieve more powerful sound reproduction In this case the same sound is output from the two subwoofers Connecting your equipment Installing your speaker system At the very least front left and right speakers only are necessary Note that your main surround speakers should always be connected as a pair but you can connect just one Surround back speaker if you like it must be con nected to the left Surround back terminal Standard surround connection The front height terminals can also be used for the front wide and Speaker B speakers Front height setting Front height right Front height left Front wide setting Front wide right Front wide left Speaker B setting Speaker B right Speaker B left Front right Subwoofer 1 Center Subwoofer 2 Front left LINE LEVEL CE LINE LEVEL INPUT ve O INPUT SURROUND L SURROUND BACK HDZONE FRONT HEIGHT WIDE E L Single R L per SPEAKERS Surround back speaker terminals can be used to connect to the sub zone 5 2 ch surround setting Not connected Not connected 6 2 ch surround setting Not connected Surround back 7 2 ch surround setting C e Surround back right ZONE 2 setting
293. working space in the surrounding area e When changing connections of audio or other cables for products supported by this unit confirm that you have sufficient working space in the surrounding area Listening to your system Enjoying various types of playback using the listening modes 52 Selecting WICACC lo E 54 Choosing the input SIC NN ce C S X X 54 Better sound USING Phase COntlOL uses ciaseiuiuzvronccpi mk vi rau buius aw Vez E wax nw RU YR ru Hw sd Cv Ew 54 Listening to your system Enjoying various types of playback using the listening modes Using this receiver you can listen to any source in Surround sound However the options available will depend on your speaker setup and the type of source you re listening to To play with surround sound check Standard surround sound or Using the Advanced surround effects below and select the desired mode To play with the optimum mode for the input signal see Auto playback or Using Stream Direct The sound is played in stereo when 2 channel signals are input in surround when multi channel signals are input amp Important e The listening modes and many features described in this section may not be available depending on the cur rent source settings and status of the receiver Auto playback There are many ways to listen back to source
294. y Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup If the room environment is not optimal for the Auto MCACC Setup too much background noise echo off the walls obstacles blocking the speakers from the microphone the final settings may be incorrect Check for household appliances air conditioner fridge fan etc that may be affecting the environment and switch them off if necessary If there are any instructions showing in the front panel display please follow them e Some older TVs may interfere with the operation of the microphone If this seems to be happening switch off the TV when doing the Auto MCACC Setup Basic Setup The Input Setup menu You only need to make settings in the Input Setup menu if you didn t hook up your digital equipment according to the default settings see Input function default and possible settings on page 39 In this case you need to tell the receiver what equipment is hooked up to which terminal so the buttons on the remote control correspond to the components you ve connected e The OSD display is only displayed when the receiver s HDMI OUT 1 terminal and the TV s HDMI input are connected with an HDMI cable If the TV is connected with anything other than an HDMI cable watch the front panel display while performing the various operations and making settings 1 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the receiver operation mode and then press HOME MENU A Graphical User I
295. y be made with DVl equipped components compatible with both DVI and High Bandwidth Digital Content Protection HDCP If you choose to connect to a DVI connector you will need a separate adaptor DVI HDMI to do so A DVI connection however does not support audio signals Consult your local audio dealer for more information e f you connect a component that is not compatible with HDCP an HDCP ERROR message is displayed on the front panel display Some components that are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be dis played but so long as there is no problem with displaying video this is not a malfunction e Depending on the component you have connected using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers This receiver supports SACD Dolby Digital Plus Dolby TrueHD and DTS HD Master Audio To take advantage of these formats however make sure that the component connected to this receiver also supports the corre sponding format Use a High Speed HDMI Cable If an HDMI cable other than a High Speed HDMI Cable is used it may not work properly e When an HDMI cable with a built in equalizer is connected it may not operate properly e Signal transfer is only possible when connected to a compatible component e HDMI format digital audio transmissions require a longer time to be recognized Due to this interruption in the audio may occur when switching between audio formats or beginning playback e Tur
296. y device and connect the device to the USB port When the file is found software updating starts automatically Update via USB UE11 UE22 Updating has failed Use the same procedure to update the software again UE33 ZONE Setup Switches the sub zone setting 1 Select ZONE Setup from the Other Setup menu 2 Select MAIN HDZONE then press ENTER 3 Set the usage of the HDMI OUT 2 terminal MAIN Select this to output the same input source as in the main zone After setting this to MAIN exit the home menu then press OUT P and select the terminal for HDMI output page 71 e HDZONE Use the HDMI output s multizone function HDZONE to output an input source different from the one in the main zone page 72 4 Select OK then press ENTER ZONE 2 setup When making multi zone connections using the AUDIO ZONE 2 OUT terminals and performing playback in Zone 2 you can set whether to adjust the Zone 2 volume on the receiver or to fix it to a specific volume 40 dB Fixed or O dB Fixed This is set to Variable upon shipment from the factory allowing the volume to be adjusted on the receiver If you would like to adjust the volume from the connected amplifier make the setting below his setting is not possible if multi zone settings have been made using the speaker terminals and Speaker System is set to anything other than ZONE 2 In this case adjust the volume for the sub zones on the receiver A CAUT
297. y use the Virtual Wide mode if the surround speakers are on and the FW setting is set to NO It can also not be used when playing signals containing actual front wide channel information his mode is effective for contents with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz or less his mode is effective for contents with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz or less e You can t use the Virtual Depth mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or Stream Direct modes is selected Setting the Video options There are a number of additional picture settings you can make using the VIDEO PARAMETER menu The defaults if not stated are listed in bold amp Important Setting STREAM Stream Smoother lt e gt e When MAIN HDZONE is set to HDZONE the VIDEO PARAMETER menu setting only affects the HDMI OUT 1 terminal signal Also when HDZONE is set to ON VIDEO PARAMETER cannot be set does not work e Note that if an option cannot be selected on the VIDEO PARAMETER menu it is unavailable due to the current source setting and status of the receiver e All of the setting items can be set for each input function However with the audio only input function VIDEO PARAMETER cannot be set Also when HDZONE is set to ON VIDEO PARAMETER cannot be set does not work e Setting items other than V CONV can only be selected when V CONV is set to ON 1 Press MAIN RECEIVER to switch the remote control to the rec
298. your equipment eg ummm TST Irn order to listening to HD audio with this receiver connect an HDMI cable and use analog video cable for Connecting your TV with no HDMI input ieee N This diagram shows connections of a TV with no HDMI input and DVD player or other playback component to Depending on the player it may not be possible to output video signals to both HDMI and other video output the receiver composite etc simultaneously and it may be necessary to make video output settings Please refer to the operating instructions supplied with your player for more information amp Important e f you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the receiver connect the receiver and TV with audio cables e With these connections the picture is not output to the TV even if the DVD player is connected with an HDMI page 24 D cable Connect the receiver and TV using the same type of video cable as used to connect the receiver and e f you use an optical digital audio cable or RCA analog audio cable you ll need to tell the receiver which digi player tal input you connected the player to see The Input Setup menu on page 39 Also when the receiver and TV are connected by anything other than an HDMI cable the OSD function allow ing display of the receiver s settings operations etc on the TV s screen cannot be used In this case watch the receiver s front panel display while performing the various operations and making set
299. ystem amp Speaker B connection e 5 2 channel surround system amp Front Bi amping connection High quality surround e 5 2 channel surround system amp ZONE 2 connection Multi Zone e 5 2 channel surround system amp HDZONE connection Multi Zone 4 3 Connecting the speakers Placing the speakers on page 20 e Connecting the speakers on page 20 Installing your speaker system on page 21 e Bi amping your speakers on page 21 d 4 Connecting the components e About the audio connection on page 22 e About the video converter on page 23 e Connecting your TV and playback components on page 24 e Connecting AM FM antennas on page 29 e Plugging in the receiver on page 34 4 5 Power On 4 6 Changing the OSD display language OSD Language page 40 E 7 Using the AVNavigator functions page 36 i 8 MCACC speaker settings e Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC on page 37 4 9 The Input Setup menu page 39 When using connections other than the recommended connections 4 10 Basic playback page 42 i 11 Adjusting the sound and picture quality as desired e Using the various listening modes page 51 e Better sound using Phase Control page 54 Measuring the all EQ type SYMMETRY ALL CH ADJ FRONT ALIGN page 82 e Changing the channel level while listening page 90 e Switching on off the Acoustic Calibration EQ Auto Sound Retriever or Dialog Enhancement page 67 e Setting the PQLS function p
300. z 176 4 kHz 192 kHz 16 bit 24 bit 2 ch 5 0 ch 5 1 eh lt C gt 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 16 bit 2 ch 5 kbps to 320 kbps Supported Supported 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 16 bit och 16 kbps to 320 kbps Supported Supported 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 88 2 kHz 96 kHz 16 bit 24 bit Zen 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 88 2 kHz 96 kHz 176 4 kHz 192 kHz 16 bit 24 bit 2 ch 50ch 5 1eh SCS Basic playback Extension Category 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz Sampling frequency 88 2 kHz 96 kHz 176 4 kHz AIFF ju AIFF 192 kHz Quantization bitrate 16 bit 24 bit Channel een Sampling frequency 2 8224 MHz DSD dff DSDIFF o es des DSF Quantization bitrate 1 bit Channel 2 ch MPEG Layer 3 audio decoding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia 176 4 kHz and 192 kHz support 2 channel audio sources only Gapless playback is not possible with a 5 0 channel or 5 1 channel audio source Files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be playable but some parts of the specification are not supported specifi cally Pro Lossless Voice e Uncompressed FLAC files are not supported Pioneer does not guarantee playback DSD files cannot be played in the sub zone Q O O g Photo files Category Extension Format Meeting the following conditions JPEG jpg e Baseline JPEG format e Y Cb Cr 4 2 2 Playing an MHL compatible device MHL Mobile High definition Link is an interface

- Projektor.pl

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents